Appendix Table 4
Appendix Table 4
Appendix Table 4
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
THESIS<br />
AN ANALYSIS OF ENGLISH TERMS OF THAI MUSIC: THAI MUSICAL<br />
INSTRUMENTS, THAI MUSICAL ENSEMBLES, AND TYPES OF THAI<br />
MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS<br />
ANGSANA INBOON<br />
A Thesis Submitted in Partial Fulfillment of<br />
the Requirements for the Degree of<br />
Master of Arts (English for Specific Purposes)<br />
Graduate School, Kasetsart University<br />
2004<br />
ISBN 974-274-773-3
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />
The thesis has been accomplished with the support of many persons. Firstly, I<br />
would like to express my deepest gratitude to Asst. Prof Bhikul Punyaratabandhu, my<br />
thesis advisor, for her invaluable time and assistance, encouragement, and support.<br />
This thesis would not have been successful without her patience, help and concern in<br />
my study.<br />
I am particularly grateful to my major field advisor, Mr. Richard Goldrick who<br />
advised and edited all the grammatical points. Without him, this thesis would not have<br />
been completed. I am very much indebted to Mr. Jaruek Rajsombat for his help and<br />
suggestions. Also, I am especially thankful to Asst. Prof Narong Kiantongkul, the<br />
Graduate School Representative and expert in the field of Thai music, for his<br />
supportive comments and counsel for the defense.<br />
My special gratitude go to all teachers of all my life, especially all ESP<br />
teachers, who have taught me in ESP courses , and Thai music teachers, who have<br />
taught me Thai music both theory and practical skills.<br />
Many thanks go to all of my dear friends for their love, care, and assistance<br />
during the years of my study. Thanks very much for many persons I have not<br />
mentioned here who are never the less very much appreciated.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS (CONTINUED)<br />
Finally, I would like to extend my warmest appreciation to my parents, my<br />
aunts, and relatives for their kindness, love, support, care, and understanding. Thank<br />
you very much with all my heart.<br />
Angsana Inboon<br />
September 2004
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
LIST OF TABLES iii<br />
LIST OF FIGURES vi<br />
CHAPTER I INTRODUCTION 1<br />
Rationale of the Study 1<br />
Objective of the Study 6<br />
Importance of the Study 6<br />
Scope of the Study 6<br />
Definition of Terms 7<br />
CHAPTER II LITERATURE REVIEW 9<br />
Translation Equivalences 9<br />
Relevant Research 18<br />
CHAPTER III METHODOLOGY 26<br />
Research Design 26<br />
Data Collection Procedure 27<br />
Data Analysis 31<br />
Reliability Assurance 36<br />
CHAPTER IV RESULTS 37<br />
The Findings on English Terms of Thai Music 37<br />
Strategies Used by Writers in Presenting English Terms<br />
of Thai Music 39<br />
i<br />
Page
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)<br />
CHAPTER V DISCUSSION 58<br />
Summary of the Results 58<br />
Discussion and Suggestions for Further Research 62<br />
LITERATURE CITED 67<br />
APPENDIX 70<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> A The Lists of Thai Music Terms 71<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> B Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting<br />
English Terms of Thai Music 124<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> C The Lists of Strategies Used in Presenting<br />
Thai Music Terms 213<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> D The Differences on Strategies Used in Presenting<br />
Thai Music Terms 255<br />
ii<br />
Page
LIST OF TABLES<br />
<strong>Table</strong> Page<br />
1 Names of Thai Musical Instruments 30<br />
2 Names of Thai Musical Ensembles 30<br />
3 Names of Types of Thai Musical Instruments 30<br />
4 Thai Musical Instruments 32<br />
5 Thai Musical Ensembles 33<br />
6 Types of Thai Musical Instruments 34<br />
7 The Number of English Terms for Thai Musical Instruments, Ensembles,<br />
and Types of Instruments Collected from the Five Books and in<br />
Saranukromsapdontrithai [Dictionary of Thai Music (in Thai)] 37<br />
8 Frequency of Occurrence of All the Strategies that Each Writer Used<br />
for Presenting English Terms of Thai Musical Instruments. 39<br />
9 Frequency of Occurrence of All the Strategies that Each Writer Used<br />
for Presenting English Terms of Thai Musical Ensembles. 47<br />
iii
LIST OF TABLES (CONTINUED)<br />
<strong>Table</strong> Page<br />
10 Frequency of Occurrence of All the Strategies that Each Writer Used<br />
for Presenting English Terms of Types of Thai Musical Instruments 53<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong><br />
1 Lists of Names of Thai Musical Instruments 72<br />
2 Lists of Names of Thai Musical Ensembles 111<br />
3 Lists of Names of Types of Thai Musical Instruments 122<br />
4 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms<br />
of Thai Musical Instruments 125<br />
5 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms<br />
of Thai Musical Ensembles 194<br />
6 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms<br />
of Types of Thai Musical Instruments 210<br />
7 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting<br />
Thai Musical Instruments 256<br />
iv
LIST OF TABLES (CONTINUED)<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> Page<br />
8 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting<br />
Thai Musical Ensembles 262<br />
9 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting<br />
Types of Thai Musical Instruments 264<br />
v
LIST OF FIGURES<br />
Figure Page<br />
1 An Overview of the Translation Task 16<br />
vi
A Brief Introduction to Thai Music<br />
CHAPTER I<br />
INTRODUCTION<br />
Rationale of the Study<br />
Thai music is one part of Thai culture and has a complicated history. Since<br />
before the establishment of the first Thai Kingdom, Thai people have invented many<br />
different kinds of Thai musical instruments and developed ways of playing them<br />
(Yupho, 1960); however, some types of instruments as well as ways of playing them<br />
have been adopted and adapted from other countries, as is mentioned in the<br />
Tribhumikatha, one of the first books written in Thai, and on a stone inscription from<br />
the time of King Ramkhamhaeng of the Sukhothai period (The National Identity<br />
Office, Office of the Prime Minister, Royal Thai Government, 1995).<br />
Thai music plays a vital part in everyday Thai life. It is performed during<br />
many types of ceremonies of the court and of ordinary people. It draws much of its<br />
meaning from its function in Buddhist ceremonies and life cycle rituals as listed below<br />
(Jearaditharporn, 1973 cited in Moro, 1998: 378):<br />
1. Buddhist ceremonies<br />
1.1 songkraan : water-throwing festival, at the Thai New Year
Buddha<br />
1.2 wisaakha: commemorates the birth, enlightenment, and death of the<br />
1.3 khaw phansaa: the beginning of Buddhist Lent<br />
1.4 saat: an autumnal feast<br />
1.5 auk phansaa: the end of Buddhist Lent<br />
1.6 kathin: presentation of robes to monks after Buddhist Lent.<br />
1.7 loy krathong: a not specifically Buddhist festival in which participants<br />
float offerings on water<br />
1.8 maakhaa buchaa: Buddhist saints’ day<br />
1.9 theet mahaachaat: a sermon on the penultimate life of the Buddha<br />
2. Life-cycle ceremonies<br />
2.1 tham khwan: a rite performed at various life cycle celebrations such as<br />
the ordination of young men into the monkhood, and the “top-knot cutting” puberty<br />
rite [rarely performed today]<br />
2.2 weddings<br />
2.3 funerals<br />
2
2.4 tham bun: merit-making rite, performed as part of both Buddhist and<br />
life-cycle observances<br />
The melodies played at different ceremonies vary. So do most of the musical<br />
instruments which form the ensembles that play the melodies. For example, the<br />
melodies played at funerals tend to create the feeling of sadness while those<br />
performed at merit-making rites tend to stimulate the feeling of happiness, and<br />
therefore different musical instruments must be used. Thus Thai instruments are<br />
grouped into many different kinds of Thai music ensembles and each Thai musical<br />
composition was limited to certain kinds of ensembles at certain ceremonies.<br />
Moreover, some ceremonies, like theet mahaachaat, tham khwan, tham bun, weddings<br />
and funerals ceremonies, limit the titles of the compositions that may be played and<br />
the standard order in which they are performed during the rituals. Many of these Thai<br />
music compositions were adopted or adapted from melodies of other countries. The<br />
title of each of these musical compositions normally begins with the name of the<br />
country where the melody originated in order to honor that country. Moreover, some<br />
music compositions were named by using the name of places whose beauty is<br />
described in the lyrics.<br />
The names of Thai instruments may refer to the sound they make, characteristic<br />
shape or customary use in ensembles; the country from which they originally came; or<br />
their original names (Yupho, 1987:6-7). The following list is a classification of names<br />
of Thai musical instruments:<br />
1. Onomatopoetic names<br />
2. Names based on the characteristic shape<br />
3
3. Names based on their use in ensemble<br />
4. Names based on the country from which they were borrowed<br />
5. Original names in the language of the country of origin.<br />
The Publishing of Thai Music Articles<br />
Nowadays people in many western countries becoming more and more<br />
interested in Thai music. Foreigners have heard Thai music during their visits to<br />
Thailand. European observers have taken interest in Thai music, and articles on Thai<br />
music have been written by travellers, missionaries, officials, and musicologists since<br />
the mid-16 th century, and by musicologists in the 20 th century (Moro, 1998:37).<br />
Moreover, Thai people who have gone to live or study overseas have disseminated<br />
Thai music by having it performed in Thai restaurants and offering courses at Thai<br />
temples. A number of tertiary institutions in other countries have included it in their<br />
music curricula in the fields of musicology and ethnomusicology. Many students, both<br />
foreigners and Thais, studying at tertiary institutions offering musicology and<br />
ethnomusicology are becoming more and more interested in writing papers, academic<br />
articles, and books about Thai music.<br />
The Translation of Thai Music<br />
In articles written in English about Thai music, it is noticeable that each writer<br />
uses a variety of terms to name, define and explain, songs, melodies, and instruments,<br />
and this, very often, confuses people who read more than one article. Those who<br />
already have background knowledge of Thai music may easily understand what they<br />
4
are reading, but those who have little or no background knowledge may be confused<br />
when they come across technical terms without any explanation or definition.<br />
Different writers have used different terms in discussing the same thing about<br />
Thai music because there are several strategies the writers have used to present terms.<br />
In terms of lexis, one of the most important things that writers need to consider is<br />
translation equivalence. The translators may encounter the problem of finding the<br />
equivalent meaning when they translate Thai words to English words. Many strategies<br />
have been used to represent those words. For example, some writers use transliteration<br />
strategies and give the definition after each word; some use cultural substitutes, while<br />
others use both of these strategies together in the same presentation.<br />
In terms of transliteration, each writer has used his or her own system of<br />
romanization to present terms of Thai music and this may confuse readers when they<br />
find different transliterations in other papers.<br />
English technical terms of Thai music are very interesting to study. Many of<br />
them cannot be understood clearly by readers. When each writer uses different terms to<br />
represent the same Thai word, the readers may be confused. Therefore it is beneficial<br />
to the dissemination of Thai classical music to survey and collect the English terms of<br />
Thai music used by prominent writers and study the strategies they used in presenting<br />
Thai music in English.<br />
5
Objectives of the Study<br />
1. To survey and collect the English terms of Thai music<br />
2. To analyze the strategies which the writers used in presenting technical<br />
terms of Thai music in English<br />
Importance of the Study<br />
The finding of this study will be useful to both Thais and foreigners who are<br />
interested in writing articles or translating documents about Thai music. It is also a<br />
guideline for Thai teachers of Thai music for use in teaching foreigners to play Thai<br />
instruments. Moreover, it is a guideline for developing a dictionary of Thai music<br />
technical terms.<br />
Scope of the Study<br />
1. Terms were taken from the following Thai music books written in English:<br />
1.1 Morton, David. 1976. The Traditional Music of Thailand. Los<br />
Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
1.2 Myer, Moro. 1998. Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary<br />
Bangkok. Los Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
1.3 Phra Chen Duriyanga. 1968. Thai Music. Bangkok<br />
6
1.4 Pradipasen, Pradhak. 1976. Thai Classical Music. Bangkok<br />
1.5 Yupho, Dhanit. 1987. Thai Musical Instruments. Bangkok<br />
2. The study focuses on analyzing names of Thai musical instruments,<br />
names of Thai musical ensembles and names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
Only the words from chapters concerning those topics were studied.<br />
Definitions of Terms<br />
1. SL stands for source language<br />
Source language means the Thai terms of the Thai music as officially<br />
defined in Saranukromsapdontrithai (Dictionary of Thai Music), which is in the<br />
Thai language.<br />
2. TL stands for target language<br />
Target language means the English language<br />
3. ST stands for source text<br />
Source text means the Saranukromsapdontrithai<br />
4. TT stands for target text<br />
Target text means the five books from which the researcher collected<br />
words and descriptions to analyze<br />
5. Generic word means translating specific words by using a general terms.<br />
For example: กลองแขก = foreign drum (the word แขก is translated as foreign)<br />
7
Explanation: The word “แขก” is the specific word which refers to peoples of Asia to<br />
the west of Thailand such as Arabs and Indians. But the word “foreign” is a generic<br />
word; it is much more general.<br />
6. Specific word means translating general words by using specific terms.<br />
For example: แตรฝรั่ง<br />
= European trumpet (the word ฝรั่ง<br />
is translated as European)<br />
Explanation: The word “ฝรั่ง”<br />
is the generic word referring to both Europeans and<br />
Westerners. But the translator renders it “European”, the meaning of which is more<br />
limited, or specific, than that of “ฝรั่ง”<br />
7. Cultural substitute means to translate with a word referring to an item or<br />
concept of the receptor language culture.<br />
8
CHAPTER II<br />
LITERATURE REVIEW<br />
There are two subjects relevant to this research<br />
1. translation equivalence theories<br />
2. relevant research<br />
Translation Equivalences<br />
Jakobson (1959) explained that there are three kinds of translation:<br />
1. intralingual (within one language, i.e. rewording or paraphrase)<br />
2. interlingual (between two different written languages)<br />
3. intersemiotic or transmutation (between sign systems).<br />
According to his theory, interlingual refers to translation between two different<br />
languages. He focused on the problem of equivalence in meaning between words in<br />
different languages saying that ‘there is ordinarily no full equivalence between codeunits.’<br />
The translator uses synonyms in order to get the ST message across. From the<br />
grammatical point of view, SL may differ from TL and this may cause problems in<br />
finding a translation equivalent. Jakobson stated that ‘whenever there is deficiency,
terminology may be qualified and amplified by loanwords or loan-translations,<br />
neologisms or semantic shifts, and finally, by circumlocutions.’<br />
Catford (1965) stated that “Translation equivalence occurs when an SL (Source<br />
Language) and a TL (Target Language) text or item are relatable to (at least some of)<br />
the same features of substance”. He separated translation equivalence into two types:<br />
textual equivalence and formal correspondence.<br />
In his study, Catford defined textual equivalence as follows: “A textual<br />
translation equivalent is any TL form (text or portion of text) which is observed to be<br />
the equivalent of a given SL form (text or portion of text)”.<br />
In terms of formal correspondence, there are five levels of translation<br />
equivalence: sentence level, subordinate clause level, phrase level, lexical level and<br />
morpheme level.<br />
Baker (1992) also explained that there are different levels of “equivalence” She<br />
distinguishes between:<br />
1. Word equivalence: when translating from SL to TL, the first thing that a<br />
translator needs to consider is word level. She said “a single word can sometimes be<br />
assigned different meanings in different languages and might be regarded as being a<br />
more complex unit or morpheme”. This means that the translator should pay attention<br />
to a number of factors when considering a single word, such as number, gender and<br />
tense.<br />
10
2. Grammatical equivalence: when translating from SL to TL, problems of<br />
finding a direct correspondence in the TL may occurred, and translators may add or<br />
omit information because of the particular grammatical devices in the TL itself.<br />
Amongst the grammatical devices which might cause problems in translation, Baker<br />
focuses on number, tense and aspects, voice, person and gender.<br />
3. Textual equivalence: when translating from SL to TL, a translator needs to<br />
consider useful guidelines for the comprehension and analysis of the SL and whether<br />
and how s/he will maintain the cohesion of the SL text or not. His or her decision will<br />
be guided by three main factors: the target audience, the purpose of the translation and<br />
the text type.<br />
4. Pragmatic equivalence: when translating from SL to TL, the translator<br />
needs to imply meanings in translation in order to get the ST message across. It is very<br />
necessary to consider the aims of the authors in SL culture in order to make the reader<br />
in TL understand it clearly.<br />
As for word or lexical level, Supol (1999) said that translation equivalence can<br />
be divided into:<br />
1. one-to-one correspondence: one word in the source language can be<br />
translated into one word in the target language<br />
2. one-to-many correspondence: one word in the source language can be<br />
translated into many words in the target language.<br />
11
3. many-to-one correspondence: many words in the source language can<br />
be translated into one word in target language.<br />
4. one-to-nil correspondence: one word in the source language cannot be<br />
translated into any words in the target language. The writer may use the original word<br />
or add a definition to explain the word.<br />
5. one-to-part correspondence: one word in the source language can give<br />
only part of the meaning in the target language. For example, the word “ น้ําใจ”<br />
can<br />
be translated as “spirit” but this does not express the exact meaning of the word<br />
“น้ําใจ”.<br />
Newmark (1988) stated that lexis is a difficulty in translation. Lexis includes<br />
words, collocations and fixed phrases or idioms, neologisms and ‘unfindable’ words.<br />
The main problem in translating words is that the translator does not understand the<br />
words or she/he finds that those words are hard to translate. Normally, unfindable word<br />
can be transferred (or transliterated) with the addition of some generic information.<br />
The strategy of transliteration is to replace each SL letter unit with a TL letter<br />
(Catford, 1965)<br />
Newmark called a word in the source language which cannot be transferred to<br />
the target language as a “No-Equivalent word”. He said the translator needs to use<br />
several words to explain that one word in the form of a footnote.<br />
For technical and descriptive terms, Newmark explained that the translator may<br />
use a descriptive term for a technical object for three reasons:<br />
12
1. the object is new, and has not got a name yet.<br />
2. the descriptive term is used as a familiar alternative, to avoid repetition.<br />
3. the descriptive term is used to make a contrast with another one.<br />
Nida (1982) divided translation equivalence into two types: formal<br />
correspondence and dynamic equivalence. Formal corespondence focuses attention on<br />
the message itself, in both form and content, whereas dynamic equivalence is based on<br />
the relationship between receptor and message.<br />
Formal correspondence consists of a TL item which represents the closest<br />
equivalent of a SL word or phrase; there are not always formal equivalents between<br />
language pairs. Formal equivalents should be used wherever possible if the translation<br />
aims at achieving formal rather than dynamic equivalence. Formal correspondence is<br />
said to distort the grammatical and stylistic patterns of the receptor language, and<br />
hence can distort the message, and cause the receptor to misunderstand.<br />
Dynamic equivalence provides the translator with a theory which can deal with<br />
the cultural challenges. It is defined as a translation principle according to which a<br />
translator seeks to translate the meaning of the original message. Nida also defines the<br />
goal of dynamic equivalence as seeking ‘the closest natural equivalent to the sourcelanguage<br />
message’.<br />
Dynamic equivalence contains three terms;<br />
1. equivalent, which refers to the source-language message<br />
13
2. natural, which refers to the receptor language: a natural rendering<br />
should fit the whole target language and culture, the context of the specific message<br />
and the target language audience.<br />
3. closest, which means the word used "binds the two orientations together on<br />
the basis of the highest degree of approximation".<br />
Apart from the types of formal correspondence and dynamic equivalence in his<br />
translation equivalence theory, Nida also pointed out that a natural translation has to<br />
deal with two main areas of adaptation, namely grammar and lexicon. The<br />
grammatical adaptation takes place more readily since one is obliged to make<br />
adjustments such as shifting word order or using nouns instead of verbs in the receptor<br />
language. The lexical structure of the source message is less easily adjusted to the<br />
semantic requirements of the receptor language because there are no strict grammatical<br />
rules but a variety of options.<br />
With regard to lexis, there are three levels which the translator has to consider;<br />
1. terms for which there are many equivalents<br />
2. terms which identify culturally different objects but with similar function;<br />
the translator has to use a term which reflects the form of the referent or a term which<br />
identifies the equivalent function.<br />
3. terms which identify cultural specialities; these provide the translator with<br />
truly cultural words, which bring with them foreign associations.<br />
14
In his study, it appears that Nida is in favour of the application of dynamic<br />
equivalence as a more effective translation procedure. Thus, the product of the<br />
translation process, that is the text in the TL, must have the same impact on the<br />
different readers it is addressing. Only in Nida and Taber (1969) is it clearly stated that<br />
'dynamic equivalence in translation is far more than mere correct communication of<br />
information'. Despite using a linguistic approach to translation, Nida is much more<br />
interested in the message of the text or, in other words, in its semantic quality. He<br />
therefore strives to make sure that this message remains clear in the target text.<br />
Similar to Nida, Newmark (1988) suggested the use of the strategies of<br />
‘semantic’ and ‘communicative’ translation. The communicative translation is the<br />
same as Nida’s dynamic equivalence, while semantic translation is similar to Nida’s<br />
formal equivalence.<br />
The theory of dynamic equivalence of Nida is called by Newmark (1987)<br />
“equivalent effect or equivalent response principle”. He explained that the overriding<br />
purpose of any translation should be to achieve equivalent effect or to produce the<br />
same effect on the readership of the translation as was obtained on the readership of<br />
the original. This is the desirable result, rather than the aim of any translation. He<br />
separated the factors of translation into two cases:<br />
1. The result of the purpose of the SL text is to affect and the TL translation is<br />
to inform (or vice versa)<br />
2. There is a pronounced cultural gap between the SL and the TL text.<br />
15
Cultural Based Translation<br />
According to Larson (1984), to translate from a source language to a receptor<br />
language, a translator needs to consider both language and culture. The goal is to<br />
express the same meaning in the receptor language, and this may require forms that<br />
may be very different from those of the source text. Translation consists of lexicon,<br />
grammatical structure, communication situation, and cultural context of the source<br />
language text which has to be transferred appropriately to the receptor language and its<br />
cultural context. The process illustrated in Figure 1.<br />
Figure 1 An overview of the translation task<br />
Source: Larson (1984)<br />
One of the most difficult problems in translating is to find lexical equivalents<br />
as the words in SL and TL will not match because of the differences in geography,<br />
customs, beliefs, worldview, and various other factors. When a speaker of a source<br />
language talks about his culture, which is very different from that of speakers of the<br />
receptor language, it is necessary for the translator to find the most comprehensible<br />
way to convey the concept. There are two considerations in finding adequate lexical<br />
equivalents.<br />
16
1. If the concepts of a topic in the source language are known in the receptor<br />
language, the translator may translate by using nonliteral lexical equivalents and<br />
descriptive phrases and by using related words that are equivalents such as synonyms,<br />
doublets, generic-specific words or sometimes negating antonyms.<br />
2. When the concepts of a topic in the source language are not known in the<br />
receptor language, the translator must find an appropriate way to explain them. This<br />
means that if the objects and events in the source language are not known in the<br />
receptor language, the translator needs to find an appropriate way to refer to them as<br />
well as a way to express the concepts which are new in the receptor language. There<br />
are three basic ways that a translator may use to find an equivalent expression in the<br />
receptor lanugage. These are a generic word with a descriptive phrase, a loan word and<br />
a cultural substitute (Beekman and Callow, 1974 cited in Larson,1984)<br />
Regarding culture, Nida (1964) said that "no translation that attempts to bridge<br />
a wide cultural gap can hope to eliminate all traces of the foreign setting". He stated<br />
that “it is inevitable that when source and receptor languages represent very different<br />
cultures there should be many basic themes and accounts which cannot be<br />
‘naturalized’ by the process of translating”.<br />
In his later study, Nida (1994) further states regarding cultural functions of<br />
translation that “It is true that translation and interpretation of the source and target<br />
languages must be implicitly or explicitly compared, but all such inter-lingual<br />
communication extends far beyond the mechanics of linguistic similarities and<br />
contrasts”. One of the main reasons for this is that the meaning of verbal symbols on<br />
any and every level depends on the culture of the language community. Language is a<br />
part of culture, and in fact, it is the most complex set of habits that any culture exhibits.<br />
17
Language reflects the culture, provides access to the culture, and in many respects<br />
constitutes a model of the culture.<br />
For Nida, the success of translation depends on achieving equivalent response.<br />
It is one of the following ‘four basic requirements of a translation, which are:<br />
1. making sense<br />
2. conveying the spirit and manner of the original<br />
3. having a natural and easy form of expression<br />
4. producing a similar response<br />
Relevant Research<br />
So far no research on an analysis of English lexical terms of Thai classical<br />
music has been conducted. However, there are some studies of music and translation<br />
as follows:<br />
A study of music translation<br />
Wichaidist (1997) studied Western musical instrument translation in Thai<br />
music publishing. The names of about 33 Western musical instruments were gathered<br />
from ten current music appreciation books and were analyzed from both the linguistic<br />
and the sociolinguistic points of view, focusing on the translation strategies and the<br />
most frequently used strategies.<br />
18
The results indicated that there is not any set standard for Western music<br />
instrument terms. She found that technical terms have been mainly used in two ways:<br />
direct borrowings by transliteration and coining of new words for 17 categories.<br />
In her study, she also mentioned the problems of general translation and music<br />
translation of Pinitpouvadol (1986) who stated that there are a lot of problems in music<br />
translation. The translator needs to have the following qualifications: knowledge, skill,<br />
meticulousness, improvisation, harmony and logical concepts. The major problems are<br />
the problems of language, the problems of general knowledge and the problems of<br />
publishing and market.<br />
Moreover, Leosiripong (1995) suggested that Thai translators can solve music<br />
translation problems by using a dictionary and direct transliterations.<br />
Wisedsook (2002) studied techniques in translating of song lyrics in animated<br />
films from English into Thai. The translating was done by by Tanee Poonsuwan. The<br />
data was twenty-six original lyrics and their Thai translations from four animated<br />
films, “Anatasia”, “Hercules”, “The Little Mermaid”, and “The Prince Of Egypt”.<br />
The results showed that the translation techniques applied by the translator<br />
were both literal and free translation. There are three musical factors that influenced<br />
the translation, which are the relation of music and lyrics, rhyme, and the tone of<br />
songs.<br />
19
A Study of Cultural Based Translation<br />
Kaewsuwan (1998) analyzed culture-based text translation from Thai into<br />
English. The study investigated the patterns of word, sentence and text level<br />
translations presently used in culture-based text translations from Thai into English in<br />
which Thai traditions were analyzed, compared and classified according to the theories<br />
of semantics, syntax, text analysis and translation. The subjects used in this study were<br />
13 articles on Thai traditions in life printed in Thai and English versions in Kinnaree<br />
Magazine from 1995 to 1997. The contents were concerned with religion, beliefs and<br />
values, which are major components of Thai culture.<br />
Thirty-one translation patterns classified by using the lexical equivalents<br />
proposed by Larson (1984). The researcher found interesting and unexpected<br />
problems: differing roles of the translator and the researcher, ambiguities of language<br />
used in the original and inappropriate words in the original.<br />
Studies of Thai to English Translation<br />
Meemeskul-Martin (1984) studied the translation process from Thai to English<br />
and from English to Thai in the research entitled “Towards a Descriptive Model of<br />
Thai-English Translation”. She discussed the translation process related to problems in<br />
Thai – English translation. The problems were at both the sentence and word levels.<br />
From her observations, the Thai grammatical notion of sentence has not been<br />
standardized and does not match that in English. This causes problems and difficulties<br />
in translation. Her results showed that the most suitable model of linguistic description<br />
for comparing of English and Thai as background translation is the logico-semantic<br />
model applied from Leech’s “Predication Analysis” (1974).<br />
20
The Conclusions<br />
The researcher was inspired to do an analysis of Thai music technical terms<br />
after reading all translation strategies and relevant research, especially “The Analysis<br />
of Western Musical Instrument Technical Terminology Translation in Thai Music<br />
Publishing” by Wichaidist (1997). She focused on the translation of the names of<br />
Western musical instruments used in the symphony orchestra, from English into Thai.<br />
Her study is based on the strategy of Songsil (1983) which stated that in the<br />
translation methods in Thai publications, there are two ways of dealing with English<br />
loan word: transliterating and coining. Adapting her study, the translation of Thai<br />
music terms, from Thai into English, was studied. Three categories of terms were<br />
studied: The names of instruments, the names of ensembles, and the names of the types<br />
of instruments. These were collected from the five books. Moreover, the description of<br />
each instrument, ensemble, and type was analyzed.<br />
Since the study aims to survey and to analyze the strategies which the writers<br />
of the five books used for presenting technical terms of Thai classical music, the<br />
analysis was based on translation theories which deal with translation at the lexical<br />
level. The terms used in the data analysis are the following:<br />
1. Translation: to translate from source language into target language<br />
2. Transliteration: representing word from the source language with<br />
combinations of letters of the target language<br />
21
3. Descriptive phrases<br />
3.1 Generic word: translating specific words by using general terms<br />
3.2 Specific word: translating general words by using specific terms<br />
4. Cultural substitute: using a word in the target language of an item which<br />
may be similar in appearance and function.<br />
The above topics are discussed by the authorities in translation: Catford (1965),<br />
and Beekman and Callow (1974) cited in Larson (1984). However, the researcher<br />
found that there are some other strategies that the writers of the five books have used<br />
to present technical terms of Thai classical music. Therefore the researcher has used<br />
the following list of these strategies, and will include them in the data analysis table:<br />
1. Partial translation: translating only some part of word from the source<br />
language with letters of the target langauge<br />
For example: เครื่องดีด<br />
= plucked<br />
Explanation: The translator omitted the word “เครื่อง”<br />
and translated only the word<br />
“ดีด” as “plucked”<br />
2. Partial transliteration: replacing only some letters of a word from the<br />
source language with letters of the language<br />
For example: พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
= phia<br />
Explanation: The translator omitted the word “พิณ” and transliterated only the word<br />
“เพี๊ยะ”<br />
as “phia”<br />
22
3. Descriptive phrases<br />
3.1 Modifers<br />
3.1.1 Type: whether that instrument is stringed, plucked, bowed, etc.<br />
3.1.2 Shape: physical appearance of instrument (long, thin, stick, etc.)<br />
3.1.3 Size: whether the instrument is big, small or medium sized<br />
3.1.4 Sound: whether the instrument produces high pitch or low pitch<br />
3.1.5 Material: whether the instrument is made of metal, wood, etc<br />
3.1.6 Number: the number of the parts that make up the instrument<br />
(two stringed fiddle…,etc<br />
3.1.7 Hyphenated: hyphenated modifers<br />
3.2 Similar Western instrument: when the Thai instrument is compared<br />
with a Western instrument<br />
3.3 Implement used in playing: things which are used for playing the<br />
musical instruments (drum beaters, mallets)<br />
23
3.4 Ensemble in which used: name of ensembles in which used<br />
3.5 Component instruments (for ensembles): name of instruments which<br />
are used in the ensemble<br />
ensembles<br />
3.6 Component ensembles (for ensembles): the combination of the<br />
3.7 Occasion played: occasions or ceremonies in which the musical<br />
instruments are played<br />
3.8 Origin of name (ensemble): the original language or place from which<br />
that ensemble came<br />
3.9 Origin of name (ensemble): the original language or place from which<br />
that ensemble came<br />
supported<br />
3.10 Position in ensemble: where it is in ensemble and how it is<br />
3.11 Other names: the instruments or ensembles that have more<br />
than one name<br />
3.12 Function: function in an ensemble<br />
3.13 How played: how the instrument is played<br />
24
3.14 Region where played: the region in which the instrument is played<br />
3.15 Age: the age of an instrument or ensemble<br />
3.16 Reference to other instruments: reference is made to other Thai or<br />
non-Thai instruments<br />
Instrument<br />
3.17 Part of instruments: things that are combined together to form an<br />
3.18 About players: mentioning the players in the following aspects (not<br />
played by females, played by a single musician)<br />
3.19 Citation: referring to other books<br />
The table which will be used to analyze technical terms of Thai classical<br />
music will consist of the descriptive strategies above. The design of the table will be<br />
discussed in the next chapter.<br />
25
CHAPTER III<br />
METHODOLOGY<br />
Since the objectives of this research are to survey and collect the English terms<br />
of Thai music used by prominent writers and study the strategies they used in<br />
presenting Thai music in English, quantitative techniques are used in conducting this<br />
study. The procedures are divided into the following stages: research design, data<br />
collection procedure, data analysis, and reliability assurance.<br />
Research Design<br />
The researcher decided to focus on Thai music translation and used the search<br />
engines of several universities and institutes to find the books on Thai music written in<br />
English. Finally, five books were chosen since they could be easily found at those<br />
universities and institutes and contained the most data to serve the purposes of this<br />
study. Words in these books which were also found in Saranukromsapdontrithai<br />
were picked out and classified into three categories: names of Thai musical<br />
instruments, names of Thai musical ensembles, and names of types of Thai musical<br />
instruments. Then these words were analyzed based on the strategy of transliteration<br />
by Catford (1965), and the strategy of translation equivalence by Beekman and Callow<br />
(1974 cited in Larson, 1984). In addition, it was found that the writers of the five<br />
books also used some other strategies in presenting terms of Thai music. Therefore,<br />
these strategies were also included in the data analysis tables. After that, the researcher<br />
counted the frequencies of occurrence of each type of strategy and identified the<br />
strategies which were most used by the five writers.
Data Collection Procedure<br />
1. After using search engines to find Thai music books written in English in<br />
the libraries of the following institutions: Chulalongkorn University, Thammasart<br />
University, Kasetsart University, Mahidol University, The National Institute of<br />
Development Administration and The National library and the research center, the<br />
researcher decided to collect the data from the works listed below:<br />
1.1 Morton, David. 1976. The Traditional Music of Thailand. Los<br />
Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
1.2 Myer, Moro. 1998. Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary<br />
Bangkok. Los Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
1.3 Phra Chen Duriyanga. 1968. Thai Music. Bangkok<br />
1.4 Pradipasen, Pradhak. 1976. Thai Classical Music. Bangkok<br />
1.5 Yupho, Dhanit. 1987. Thai Musical Instruments. Bangkok<br />
The data were collected from these five books because the author of each of<br />
these books is a well-known authority on Thai music and the books presented general<br />
information on Thai music. The words in the chapters which deal with Thai music<br />
instruments, Thai music ensembles, and types of Thai music instruments and also<br />
which were equivalent to those found in Saranukromsapdontrithai [Dictionary of<br />
Thai Music (in Thai)] were picked out and analyzed<br />
27
The first book was written by Morton when he came to study Thai traditional<br />
music in Thailand from 1958 to 1960 and deals with the history, musical instruments,<br />
tuning systems, melodies, rhythms, tempos, ensembles, and aspects of mode, form, and<br />
compositional techniques.<br />
The musical terms were taken from Chapter Two, in which Morton described<br />
Thai music instruments, Thai music ensembles, and types of Thai music. In the<br />
glossary section Morton also gave the phonetic symbols after each musical term to<br />
help readers pronounce them correctly. However, these symbols are not included in the<br />
study. The total number of terms collected from this book was 67 names of<br />
instruments, 20 names of ensembles, and six types of instruments.<br />
The second book was written by Myers after investigation of the classical<br />
tradition of music in Thailand in 1985-6. The contents consist of an introduction to<br />
Thai music, musical instruments, an overview of Bangkok and the Thai nation,<br />
ensembles, songs, and Thai conceptions of music, its forms, structure and elements.<br />
Moreover, the social organization and schools of musicians are also discussed. All the<br />
terms for this study were taken from Chapter Three. The total number of terms was 53<br />
names of instruments, 17 names of ensembles, and five names of types of instruments.<br />
The third book was written by Phra Chen Duriyanga, a professor of Music of<br />
the Fine Arts Department, Bangkok. This book was first published in 1948. The writer<br />
divided it into three parts: 1) the technique of Thai music in relation to Western music,<br />
2) the Piphat band and its instruments, and 3) scale, score, and pitch. In addition, lists<br />
of Thai instruments and their equivalents among the Western instruments are given.<br />
The terms were taken from the second part and totaled 15 names of instruments, one<br />
name of an ensemble, and four names of types of instruments.<br />
28
The fourth book is a translation of the “Soam Song Sang” written by Tramod.<br />
It was translated by Pradipasen, Head of the Western Music Section, Music and Drama<br />
Division, Fine Arts Department, in 1976. The characteristics of Thai music, families of<br />
instruments, scale, ensembles, performing procedure, and classification of Thai music<br />
are presented. The total number of terms collected was 26 names of instruments, 12<br />
names of ensembles, and two names of types of instruments.<br />
The last book was published in 1987 on the occasion of the Eightieth Birthday<br />
Anniversary of Dhanit Yupho, who had been the Director-General of the Fine Arts<br />
Department from 1956 to 1968. The book was translated by David Morton.<br />
Yupho’s book describes the history of Thai music and Thai music instruments.<br />
Transliteration strategies and full descriptions of the exact shape and characteristics of<br />
each instrument were used in presenting terms. The total number of terms obtained<br />
from this book was 82 names of instruments, 13 names of ensembles, and six types of<br />
instruments.<br />
2. The researcher looked for the Thai music terms in the five selected books<br />
and made lists of names of Thai musical instruments, Thai musical ensembles, and<br />
types of Thai musical instruments. The words collected are presented in Thai<br />
alphabetical order in <strong>Table</strong>s 1, 2, and 3. The abbreviations below are used to represent<br />
each book.<br />
2.1 TMT stands for The Traditional Music of Thailand by David<br />
Morton. 1976<br />
29
2.2 TMMC stands for Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary<br />
Bangkok by Moro Myer. 1998<br />
2.3 TM stands for Thai Music by Phra Chen Duriyanga. 1968<br />
2.4 TCM stands for Thai Classical Music by Pradhak Pradipasen. 1976.<br />
2.5 TMI stands for Thai Musical Instruments by Dhanit Yupho. 1987.<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 1 Names of Thai Musical Instruments<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 2 Names of Thai Musical Ensembles<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 3 Names of types of Thai Musical Instruments.<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
30
Data Analysis<br />
The collected terms of Thai music were divided into three different categories:<br />
names of Thai musical instruments, names of Thai musical ensembles and names of<br />
types of Thai musical instruments. Each category was analyzed separately. The<br />
analyses are presented in <strong>Table</strong>s 4, 5, and 6<br />
31
<strong>Table</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 Thai 4 musical Thai Musical instrumentsInstruments<br />
Explaination of<br />
description and picture<br />
Description strategies<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
A ge<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Another name added<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name (instrument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar W estern instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly<br />
transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Modifiers<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
32
<strong>Table</strong> 5 Thai 5 Thai musical Musical ensembles Ensembles<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
Description strategies<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
A ge<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component<br />
instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
Transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
33
<strong>Table</strong> 6 6 Types Types of Thai of Thai musical Musical instruments Instruments<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies Explanation<br />
Translation of description and picture<br />
Partial translation+material<br />
Translation+type<br />
Translation+material<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Transliteration<br />
34
Since this study focused on analyzing the translation equivalence of technical<br />
terms and specific words in Thai music books, the analysis was based on the<br />
translation equivalence theory of Catford (1965) which explained the transliteration<br />
theory, and the theory of Beekman and Callow (1974 cited in Larson, 1984) which<br />
discussed the following ways for finding adequate equivalents:<br />
1. Using nonliteral lexical equivalents, descriptive phrases and related<br />
words as equivalents which includes the strategies of synonyms, doublets, genericspecific<br />
words or sometimes using negating antonyms for translating a word which is<br />
known in the receptor language.<br />
2. Using three basic ways to find an equivalent expression: a generic<br />
word with a descriptive phrase, a loan word, and a cultural substitute (Beckman and<br />
Callow 1974) for a word which is not known in the receptor language.<br />
After the names of Thai musical instruments, Thai musical ensembles and<br />
types of Thai musical instruments had been analyzed, based on the theory reviewed in<br />
the second chapter, the researcher counted the frequencies of occurrence of each type<br />
of strategies and identified the strategies which were most used by the five writers.<br />
Next, the researcher compared and counted the terms each writer used to represent<br />
each Thai word to find out how many words differ and how they differ: two out of four<br />
or five books counted as “different”.<br />
35
Reliability Assurance<br />
To ensure the reliability of the analysis, the research tools were presented to<br />
three advisors which consisted of both native and non-native speakers of English from<br />
the Department of Foreign Languages and a non-native speaker from the Department<br />
of Linguistics. The analysis tables ,the use of language, and the analysis of lexical<br />
translation equivalence were discussed and revised according to suggestions from all<br />
advisors.<br />
36
CHAPTER IV<br />
RESULTS<br />
This chapter is divided into two parts. The first section presents the English<br />
terms of Thai music. The second section discusses the strategies which the writers used<br />
in presenting technical terms of Thai music in English<br />
The Findings on English Terms of Thai Music.<br />
This part presents English terms found in each book.<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 7 The number of English terms for Thai musical instruments, ensembles, and<br />
types of instruments collected from the five books and in<br />
Saranukromsapdontrithai [Dictionary of Thai Music (in Thai)]<br />
Terms Saranukrom<br />
sapdontrithai<br />
Thai musical<br />
89<br />
instruments<br />
Thai musical<br />
ensembles<br />
30<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
67<br />
20<br />
53<br />
17<br />
15<br />
1<br />
26<br />
12<br />
82<br />
13
<strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
Terms Saranukrom<br />
sapdontrithai<br />
Types of Thai musical 10<br />
instruments<br />
Total<br />
129<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
In <strong>Table</strong> 7, the terms from the five books are divided into three categories:<br />
names of Thai musical instruments, name of Thai musical ensemble, and names of<br />
types of Thai musical instruments. The number of words collected from each of the<br />
five books is as follows:<br />
1. 93 words from TMT (The Traditional Music of Thailand), 67 of which<br />
were names of Thai musical instruments, 20 were names of Thai musical ensembles,<br />
and 10 were names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
2. 75 words from TMMC (Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary<br />
Bangkok), 53 of which were names of Thai musical instruments, 17 were names of<br />
Thai musical ensembles, and five were names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
3. 20 words from TM (Thai Music), 15 of which were names of Thai<br />
musical instruments, one was a name of a Thai musical ensemble, and four were<br />
names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
6<br />
93<br />
5<br />
75<br />
4<br />
20<br />
2<br />
39<br />
6<br />
101<br />
38
4. 40 words from TCM (Thai Classical Music), 26 of which were names of<br />
Thai musical instruments, 12 were names of Thai musical ensembles, and two were<br />
names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
5. 101 words from TMI (Thai Musical Instruments), 82 of which were<br />
names of Thai musical instruments, 13 were names of Thai musical ensembles, and six<br />
were names of types of Thai musical instruments.<br />
Strategies Used by Writers in Presenting English Terms of Thai Music<br />
This section discusses the strategies that all writers used to present English<br />
terms of Thai music. These strategies are categorized into two groups: word translation<br />
strategies and description strategies. The latter is the description of the instrument,<br />
ensemble or type of instrument after each English term.<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 8 Frequency of occurrence of the all strategies that each writer used for<br />
presenting English terms of Thai music instruments.<br />
Strategies<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
- Transliteration<br />
- Partial transliteration<br />
- Transliteration +<br />
cultural substitute<br />
- Translation + cultural<br />
substitute<br />
39<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
65<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
51<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
10<br />
2<br />
3<br />
0<br />
20<br />
0<br />
0<br />
3<br />
80<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0
<strong>Table</strong> 8 (Continued)<br />
Strategies<br />
- Cultural substitute<br />
Total<br />
Description strategies<br />
- Modifiers<br />
- Type<br />
- Shape<br />
- Size<br />
- Sound<br />
- Material<br />
- Number<br />
- Hyphenated<br />
- Translation<br />
- Partial translation<br />
- Transliteration<br />
- Partial transliteration<br />
- Cultural substitute<br />
- Generic word<br />
- Specific word<br />
- Similar Western instrument<br />
40<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
0 0 0 2 0<br />
67<br />
15<br />
35<br />
19<br />
5<br />
17<br />
19<br />
38<br />
21<br />
0<br />
7<br />
2<br />
55<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
53<br />
6<br />
32<br />
10<br />
9<br />
17<br />
19<br />
26<br />
15<br />
3<br />
5<br />
1<br />
41<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
15<br />
0<br />
7<br />
6<br />
4<br />
4<br />
1<br />
5<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
8<br />
0<br />
0<br />
13<br />
25<br />
5<br />
0<br />
5<br />
2<br />
5<br />
4<br />
5<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
11<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
82<br />
2<br />
1<br />
5<br />
0<br />
2<br />
4<br />
3<br />
9<br />
0<br />
4<br />
5<br />
17<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0
<strong>Table</strong> 8 (Continued)<br />
Strategies<br />
- Implement used in playing<br />
- Ensemble in which used<br />
- Occasion played<br />
- Origin of name (instrument)<br />
- Position in ensemble<br />
- Other names<br />
- Function<br />
- How played<br />
- Region where played<br />
- Age<br />
- Reference to other<br />
instruments<br />
- Part of instruments<br />
- About players<br />
- Citation<br />
41<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
1 8 0 0 0<br />
3 33 0 0 0<br />
1 11 0 0 0<br />
11 3 0 0 2<br />
15 13 1 0 0<br />
4 4 4 0 3<br />
1 19 1 2 0<br />
1 4 0 0 0<br />
2 3 0 0 0<br />
4 1 0 0 0<br />
5 16 0 0 0<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 8 shows the frequency of occurrence of all strategies that each writer<br />
used for presenting English terms of Thai music; it was found that five strategies were<br />
used for word translation. Transliteration was the strategy used the most in every<br />
book: 65 words in TMT, 51 words in TMMC, 10 words in TM, 20 words in TCM, and<br />
80 words in TMI.<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
6<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0
The strategy that was used the second most was the strategy of partial<br />
transliteration: two words each in TMT, TMMC, TM, and TMI. The strategy of<br />
translation + cultural substitute was represented by three words in TM, the strategy of<br />
translation + cultural substitute by three words in TCM, and the strategy of cultural<br />
substitute by two words in TCM.<br />
The description strategies can be divided into 23 categories. In presenting short<br />
descriptions, the following strategies: translation, cultural substitute, size, material,<br />
number, and hyphenated modifiers were used by all writers. The results show that the<br />
strategy of cultural substitute was used the most. The number of occurrences was 55<br />
words in TMT, 41 words in TMMC, eight words in TM, 11 words in TCM, and 17<br />
words in TMI.<br />
The strategy that was used the second most was hyphenated modifier. There<br />
were 38 words in TMT, 26 words in TMMC, five words in TM, five words in TCM,<br />
and three words in TMI. Moreover, description of shape was employed the third most:<br />
15 words in TMT, six words in TMMC, five words in TCM, and two words in TMI.<br />
The use of generic and specific word was employed the least: there was a generic word<br />
in TMT, and a specific word in TMI.<br />
Besides these, a mistransliteration was found in TCM. The word “กลองแขก”<br />
was mistransliterated as “glong tahd”<br />
The word translation strategies and short description are listed as follows:<br />
42
Word Translation Strategies<br />
Examples<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMT ระนาดทุม<br />
ranat thum<br />
TMMC ระนาดทุม<br />
ranaat thum<br />
TM ระนาดทุม<br />
ranad thume<br />
TCM ระนาดทุม<br />
ranad toom<br />
TMI ระนาดทุม<br />
rana-t thum<br />
2. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
phia<br />
TMMC ฆองมอญวงเล็ก khaung maun lek<br />
TM ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
thume lek<br />
TMI ซอสามสายหลีบ saw-li-p<br />
3. Transliteration + cultural substitute<br />
TM ฆองวงใหญ gong wong yai<br />
Remarks: The word “gong” is normally categorized as cultural substitute strategy<br />
but in this case, it may be counted as transliteration strategy because the modifier<br />
“wong yai” is put after the word “gong”, similar to the word order in Thai structure, in<br />
which normally the modifiers are put after nouns.<br />
43
4. Translation + cultural substitute<br />
TCM ฆองวงเล็ก small gong set<br />
5. Cultural substitute<br />
TCM ฉาบเล็ก cymbals<br />
Description Strategies<br />
Examples<br />
1. TMT: พิณ phin (stick zither with one string and a half-gourd<br />
resonator; India, from Sanskrit: Indian names for a plucked lute: vina (south India)<br />
and bina (north India) (p. 45)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Type: stick, plucked<br />
Shape: half<br />
Material: gourd resonator<br />
Number: one string<br />
Hyphenated: half-gourd<br />
Cultural substitute: zither, lute<br />
Origin of name/instrument: India, from Sanskrit<br />
Reference to other instruments: vina (south India) and bina (north<br />
India)<br />
44
2. TMMC: กลองแขก (cylindrical, two-headed drums held horizontally<br />
across performers’ laps. Leather heads are laced on. Played in pairs by two performers.<br />
Commonly substituted for taphoon in piiphaat ensembles and thoon/rammanaa in<br />
mahoorii and khrung saay ensembles)<br />
(p. 471)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Shape: cylindrical<br />
Material : leather<br />
Number : pair, two<br />
Hyphenated : two-headed<br />
Cultural substitute: drum<br />
Ensemble in which used: …piiphaat ensembles, mahoorii<br />
and khruang saay ensembles<br />
Position in ensemble: horizontally across performers’<br />
laps<br />
Function: substitute for taphoon…and<br />
thoon/rammanaa…<br />
Reference to other instruments: taphoon…and thoon/rammanaa…<br />
About players: …played in pairs by two<br />
performers<br />
3. TM: ระนาดทุ<br />
ม ranad thume or thume mai (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; Alto Xylophone with wooden-resonance bars or<br />
Marimba) (p.36)<br />
45
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Shape: bars<br />
Sound: alto<br />
Material: wooden<br />
Hyphenated : wooden-resonance<br />
Similar Western instrument: Xylophone, Marimba<br />
Other names: thume mai<br />
4. TCM: ซอสามสายหลีบ saw sam sai lib (a smaller three-string fiddle with<br />
higher pitches) (p. 27)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Type: string<br />
Size: smaller<br />
Sound: higher pitches<br />
Hyphenated : three-string<br />
Translation: three-string<br />
Cultural substitute: fiddle<br />
5. TMI: ฉาบ cha-p (a pair of small metal cymbals) (p. 24)<br />
46
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Size: small<br />
Material: metal<br />
Number: pair<br />
Cultural substitute: cymbals<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 9 Frequency of occurrence of all strategies that each writer used for presenting<br />
English terms of Thai music ensembles.<br />
Strategies<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
- Transliteration<br />
- Partial transliteration<br />
- Translation<br />
- Transliteration+translation<br />
-Transliteration<br />
+translation+size<br />
- Partialtransliteration<br />
+partial translation<br />
- Partial transliteration+age<br />
- Used both transliteration<br />
and partial transliteration<br />
Total<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
0<br />
8<br />
0<br />
7<br />
2<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
20<br />
7<br />
5<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
5<br />
17<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
8<br />
0<br />
1<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
12<br />
0<br />
6<br />
0<br />
7<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
13<br />
47
<strong>Table</strong> 9 (Continued)<br />
Strategies<br />
Description strategies<br />
- Modifiers<br />
Type<br />
Size<br />
Hyphenated<br />
- Translation<br />
- Partial translation<br />
- Transliteration<br />
- Partial transliteration<br />
- Component instruments (for<br />
ensembles)<br />
- Component ensembles (for<br />
ensembles)<br />
- Occasion played<br />
- Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
- Other names<br />
- Age<br />
- Comparison to other<br />
ensembles<br />
- Citation<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
0<br />
2<br />
1<br />
5<br />
4<br />
3<br />
1<br />
4<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
3<br />
4<br />
4<br />
5<br />
8<br />
0<br />
4<br />
8<br />
1<br />
6<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
1<br />
3<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
3<br />
2<br />
0<br />
2<br />
4<br />
0<br />
0<br />
6<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
48
<strong>Table</strong> 9 shows the frequency of occurrence of all strategies which each writer<br />
used for presenting English terms of Thai music ensembles. For word translation,<br />
eight strategies were found. They are transliteration, partial transliteration, translation,<br />
transliteration + translation, transliteration + translation + size, partial transliteration +<br />
partial translation, partial transliteration+ age, and the use of both transliteration and<br />
partial transliteration. In terms of description strategies, there were13 strategies,<br />
namely translation, partial translation, transliteration, partial transliteration, modifiers,<br />
component instruments (for ensembles), component ensembles (for ensembles),<br />
occasion played, origin of name (ensemble), other names, age, comparison to other<br />
ensembles, and citation.<br />
The findings show that the strategy of partial transliteration was most used in<br />
representing words: eight words in TMT, five in TMMC, and six in TMI, the strategy<br />
that was used the second most was the strategy of transliteration + translation: seven<br />
words was TMT, one in TM, two in TCM, and seven in TMI. The strategy used the<br />
third most is the strategy of transliteration: seven words in TMMC and eight in TCM.<br />
And the strategy of translation was used the least: there was only one word in TCM.<br />
In giving short descriptions, component instruments was used the most. The<br />
number of occurrences was four words in TMT, eight in TMMC, six in TCM and on in<br />
TMI. The second most used was the strategy of partial translation: there were four<br />
such words in TMT, eight in TMMC, and four words in TCM. The strategy of<br />
translation was used the third most: there were five translations of words in TMT and<br />
TMMC, two in TCM and one in TMI. The identification of the component ensemble<br />
(for ensembles) and the statement of the origin of the name (ensemble) were used the<br />
least: only one example was found, and that was in TMMC.<br />
49
Word Translation Strategies<br />
Examples<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMMC วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
wong piiphaat<br />
chaatrii<br />
TCM วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng<br />
ha<br />
2. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT วงเครื่องสาย<br />
khruang sai<br />
TMMC วงมโหรี mahori<br />
TMI วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
pi-pha-t derk dam-ban<br />
3. Translation<br />
TCM วงเครื่องสาย<br />
the string ensemble<br />
4. Transliteration+ translation<br />
TMT วงกลองแขก klong khaek ensemble<br />
TM วงปพาทย<br />
piphat band<br />
TCM วงมโหรี the mahori ensemble<br />
TMI วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
pi- pha-t cha-tri ensemble<br />
<br />
5. Transliteration+ translation+ size<br />
TMT วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or double<br />
khruangsai ensemble<br />
50
6. Partial transliteration + partial translation<br />
TMT วงปพาทยอยางเบา<br />
light pi phat<br />
่<br />
่<br />
7. Partial transliteration+ age<br />
TMT วงมโหรีเครื่องสี<br />
original mahori<br />
TCM วงมโหรีเครื่องสี<br />
wong mahori boran or<br />
ancient mahori<br />
8. Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
TMMC วงขับไม khap may or wong khap<br />
may<br />
Description Strategies<br />
Examples<br />
1. TMT: วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
(medium-sized or doubled ensemble, a pair of<br />
instruments, medium-sized or doubled piphat ensemble) (p. 105, 107)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Size: medium<br />
Hyphenated : medium-sized<br />
Translation: doubled, a pair, ensemble<br />
Transliteration: piphat<br />
51
2. TMMC: วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
(the Mon-derived ensemble (which shares certain<br />
similarities to Burmese ensembles) commonly played at cremation ceremonies.<br />
Features Mon-derived versions of the regular piiphaat instruments, plus the set of<br />
tuned drums, peeng maang khauk)<br />
(p. 486)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Modifiers<br />
Hyphenated : Mon-derived<br />
Translation: Mon<br />
Component instrumets : …plus the set of tuned drum,<br />
peeng maang khauk<br />
Occasion played: …played at cremation ceremonies<br />
Comparison to other ensembles: …similaritities to Burmese<br />
ensembles<br />
3. TCM: วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
( small string ensemble; one instrument of each<br />
kind only is used comparable to the pi-phat khre-a-ng ha)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Translation: small string ensemble<br />
Component instruments: one instrument of each kind only<br />
is used comparable to pi-phat<br />
khre-a-ng ha<br />
52
Comparison to other ensemble: one instrument of each kind only<br />
is used comparable to pi-phat<br />
khre-a-ng ha<br />
4. TMI : วงมโหรี (mixed string and percussion)ensemble (p.43,47)<br />
Strategies Used in Describing<br />
Component instruments: mixed string and percussion<br />
<strong>Table</strong> 10 Frequency of occurrence of all strategies that each writer used for presenting<br />
English terms of types of Thai music.<br />
Strategies<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
- Transliteration<br />
- Translation<br />
- Partial translation<br />
- Translation+material<br />
- Translation+type<br />
- Partial translation+material<br />
Total<br />
Description strategies<br />
Translation<br />
Sources<br />
TMT TMMC TM TCM TMI<br />
0<br />
3<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
1<br />
6<br />
0<br />
4<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
5<br />
4<br />
0<br />
3<br />
0<br />
1<br />
0<br />
0<br />
4<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
0<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0<br />
3<br />
0<br />
1<br />
2<br />
0<br />
6<br />
0<br />
53
<strong>Table</strong> 10 shows the frequency of occurrence of all strategies that each writer<br />
used for presenting English terms for the types of Thai musical instruments. Six<br />
strategies: transliteration, translation, translation + material, translation + type, and<br />
partial translation + material, were used for presenting words, and only one strategy –<br />
translation- was used in short description. The findings show that the strategy of<br />
translation was used for representing words the most; there were three such words in<br />
TMT, three in TM, two in TCM, and three words in TMI.<br />
The strategy of transliteration was used the second most: four words in TMMC.<br />
And the strategy used the third most was partial translation: two words in TMT and<br />
one in TMMC.<br />
As to description strategies, the strategy of translation was used the most: four<br />
words in TMMC.<br />
Word Translation Strategies<br />
Examples<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMMC เครื่องดีด<br />
khruang diit<br />
2. Translation<br />
TMT เครื่องสาย<br />
stringed instruments<br />
TM เครื่องตี<br />
percussion section<br />
TCM เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
melodic percussion<br />
TMI เครื่องตี<br />
percussion instruments<br />
54
3. Partial translation<br />
TMT เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked<br />
TMMC เครื่องสาย<br />
strings<br />
4. Translation+ material<br />
TM เครื่องเปา<br />
wood-wind section<br />
TMI เครื่องหนัง<br />
percussion instruments<br />
using skin or leather<br />
5. Partial translation+ material<br />
TMT เครื่องเปา<br />
woodwinds<br />
6. Translation+ type<br />
TMI เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked stringed<br />
instruments<br />
Description Strategies<br />
Example<br />
1. Translation<br />
TMMC เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked instruments<br />
From all the findings, it can be concluded that the strategies most used in<br />
representing words are transliteration, partial transliteration, and translation. Moreover,<br />
the strategies most used for short descriptions are cultural substitute, partial translation,<br />
and translation.<br />
55
Moreover, the representations of Thai names of instruments, ensembles and<br />
types of instruments taken from the five books were compared to find the differences<br />
in detail. It was found that the representations of 63 out of 89 names of Thai<br />
instruments differed in terms of the system of romanization although the same<br />
translation strategy, namely, transliteration, was used; an example is the word<br />
“กระจับป”<br />
(as shown in <strong>Appendix</strong> B <strong>Table</strong> 4, page 125)<br />
Whereas the representations of nine out of 89 names of Thai musical<br />
instruments were totally different. The translation strategies differed as well as the<br />
system of romanization; an example is the word “ซอสามสายหลีบ” (as shown in<br />
<strong>Appendix</strong> B <strong>Table</strong> 4, page 133)<br />
As for Thai musical ensembles, 14 out of 30 representations totally differed in<br />
terms of the translation strategies and the system of romanization; an example is the<br />
word “วงเครื่องสาย”<br />
(as shown in <strong>Appendix</strong> B <strong>Table</strong> 5, page 195-196), whereas eight<br />
names out of 30 differed in terms of the system of romanization, but the translation<br />
strategies are similar.<br />
Concerning the representation of the types of Thai musical instruments, fives<br />
names out of ten were also totally different strategy and system of Romanization; an<br />
example is the word “เครื่องดีด”<br />
(as shown in <strong>Appendix</strong> B <strong>Table</strong> 6, page 210).<br />
However, for three names the same strategies and the same system of romanization<br />
were used.<br />
56
In conclusion, this chapter has presented two main sections: 1) numbers of<br />
terms for Thai musical instruments, ensembles, and types of instruments and 2) the<br />
strategies which each writer used in presenting terms of Thai music in English. The<br />
significant issues of these results are discussed in the next chapter.<br />
57
CHAPTER V<br />
DISCUSSION<br />
This chapter consists of two sections. The first section is a summary of the<br />
main findings of this research. The last section is a discussion and suggestions for<br />
further research.<br />
1. The Objectives of the Study<br />
Summary of the Results<br />
The objectives of the study were: to survey and to collect the English terms<br />
for the names of Thai musical instruments, ensembles, and types of musical<br />
instruments, and to analyze the strategies which the writers used for representing<br />
technical terms of Thai music in English.<br />
2. Methodology<br />
In the first stage of the study, terms of Thai music were surveyed and collected<br />
from the five works listed below:<br />
1. Morton, David. 1976. The Traditional Music of Thailand. Los<br />
Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.
2. Myer, Moro. 1998. Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary<br />
Bangkok. Los Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
3. Phra Chen Duriyanga. 1968. Thai Music. Bangkok<br />
4. Pradipasen, Pradhak. 1976. Thai Classical Music. Bangkok<br />
5. Yupho, Dhanit. 1987. Thai Musical Instruments. Bangkok<br />
Since this research focused on analyzing names of Thai musical instruments,<br />
names of Thai musical ensembles and types of Thai musical instruments, only the<br />
words from chapters concerning those topics were selected. After the terms were<br />
collected from each book, they were divided into three categories: Thai musical<br />
instruments, Thai musical ensembles, and types of Thai musical instruments, and then<br />
each category was analyzed separately.<br />
3. Results<br />
1. Survey of terms of Thai music<br />
The number of words collected from the five books was as follows: 93<br />
words from TMT (The Traditional Music of Thailand), 75 words from TMMC (Thai<br />
Music and Musicians in Contemporary Bangkok), 20 words from TM (Thai Music),<br />
40 words from TCM (Thai Classical Music), and 101 words from TMI (Thai<br />
Musical Instruments).<br />
59
2. Analysis of translation strategies<br />
2.1. In analyzing the word translation strategies, it was found that the<br />
strategies used in presenting Thai musical instruments terms were 1.) word translation<br />
strategies which included transliteration, partial transliteration, transliteration+ cultural<br />
substitute, translation + cultural substitute, and cultural substitute, and 2.) description<br />
strategies which included the use of modifiers, translation, partial translation,<br />
transliteration, partial transliteration, cultural substitute, generic word, specific word,<br />
similar western instrument, implement used in playing, ensemble in which used,<br />
occasion played, origin of name (instrument), position in ensemble, other names,<br />
function, how played, region where played, age, reference to other instruments, part of<br />
instruments, about players, and citation. Most representations of the names of Thai<br />
musical instruments were followed by descriptions (as shown in <strong>Appendix</strong> B)<br />
The strategy of transliteration was used the most for presenting the<br />
names of instruments, and the strategy of cultural substitute was used the most in short<br />
descriptions.<br />
It was also found that the representations of 63 out of 89 names of Thai<br />
instruments differed in terms of the system of romanization although the same<br />
translation strategy, namely, transliteration, was used.<br />
2.2 In representing the names of Thai musical ensembles, it was found<br />
that writers used the following strategies: transliteration, partial transliteration,<br />
translation, transliteration + translation, transliteration + translation + size, partial<br />
transliteration + partial translation, partial transliteration + age, and used both<br />
transliteration and partial transliteration. The description strategies used by the writers<br />
60
were: the use of modifiers, translation, partial translation, transliteration, partial<br />
transliteration, component instruments (for ensembles), component ensembles (for<br />
ensembles), occasion played, origin of name (ensemble), other names, age, comparison<br />
to other ensembles, and citation. Most representations of the names Thai musical<br />
instruments were followed by description (as shown in <strong>Appendix</strong> B)<br />
The strategy of partial transliteration was used the most for representing the<br />
names of ensembles, and the strategy of component instruments was used the most in<br />
short description.<br />
The results also indicated that about 14 out of 30 representations of the<br />
names of Thai music ensembles differed totally whereas eight names out of 30 differed<br />
in terms of system of romanization, but the translation strategies were similar.<br />
2.3 As for the representations of the words for types of Thai musical<br />
instruments, the word translation strategies employed were transliteration, translation,<br />
partial translation, translation + material, translation + type, and partial translation +<br />
material. However, only one strategy - translation- was used for description strategies.<br />
The strategy of translation was used the most for presenting words and<br />
short descriptions. Concerning the representation of the types of Thai musical<br />
instruments, fives names out of ten also differed totally in terms of translation<br />
strategies and the system of romanization. The same strategies and the same system of<br />
romanization were used to represent three names.<br />
61
Discussion and suggestion of further research<br />
1. Discussion<br />
Beekman and Callow’s translation strategies as cited by Larson (1984): 1)<br />
Using the strategy of translation, and 2) Using descriptive phrases, which include the<br />
strategies of generic-specific words, are appropriate for translating a word which is<br />
known in the receptor language.<br />
Words which are not known in the receptor language can be translated by<br />
using cultural substitutes.<br />
terms.<br />
The strategy of transliteration by Catford (1965), was used to present most<br />
Besides strategies stated by authorities above, the strategy of partial translation<br />
and partial transliteration were also used in representing the names of the instruments,<br />
ensembles and types of instruments.<br />
It is noticeable that the strategy writers of the five books employed most in<br />
representing Thai music terms is the strategy of transliteration. The strategy of<br />
transliteration helps the readers to be able to pronounce the representation correctly<br />
and the description helps the readers to easily understand what the representation refers<br />
to. However, after using the transliteration, it would be helpful to either to translate it<br />
into English or compare it by using cultural substitutes.<br />
62
Besides the transliterating the Thai names of the instruments, ensembles, and<br />
types of instruments mentioned above, the researcher found that the writers also used<br />
strategies in describing instruments, ensembles, and types of instruments to help<br />
readers understand the terms more clearly. These strategies are listed as follows:<br />
1. Descriptive phrases<br />
1.1 Modifiers<br />
1.1.1 Type<br />
1.1.2 Shape<br />
1.1.3 Size<br />
1.1.4 Sound<br />
1.1.5 Material<br />
1.1.6 Number<br />
1.1.7 Hyphenated<br />
1.2 Similar Western instrument<br />
1.3 Implement used in playing<br />
1.4 Ensemble in which used<br />
1.5 Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
1.6 Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
63
1.7 Occasion played<br />
1.8 Origin of name (instrument)<br />
1.9 Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
1.10 Position in ensemble<br />
1.11 Other names<br />
1.12 Function<br />
1.13 How played<br />
1.14 Region where played<br />
1.15 Age<br />
1.16 Reference to other instruments<br />
1.17 Part of instruments<br />
1.18 About players<br />
1.19 Citation<br />
64
2. Suggestions<br />
2.1 Enlarging the corpus<br />
Books on Thai music in English written by well known authorities are<br />
rare. It is true that there are a few books on Thai music written in English but most<br />
have only one or two pages concerned with Thai instruments, ensembles, and types of<br />
instruments. Even in the five books selected, not all of the names of Thai musical<br />
instruments, Thai musical ensembles, and types of Thai musical instruments were<br />
found in every book. However, a very large corpus could be collected. It would be<br />
more beneficial and may support the results of this study if more books on Thai music<br />
are available. However, while carrying out the survey, the researcher found that most<br />
books and articles employed terms from these five books.<br />
2.2 Examining other linguistic features<br />
The present study focuses on only the lexical level of translation.<br />
Therefore it would be useful to carry out further research focusing on sentence level,<br />
subordinate clause level, phrase level, and morpheme level or on the same feature with<br />
deeper analysis.<br />
2.3 Studying terms in other categories<br />
This research focused on terms of only three categories: the names<br />
of Thai music instruments, the names of Thai music ensembles, and terms for types of<br />
Thai music instruments. Therefore it would be beneficial to the dissemination of Thai<br />
65
music to carry out studies on terms in other categories such as types of songs, types of<br />
rhythms, and so on, which are interesting and worthwhile.<br />
Furthermore, it would be very beneficial in the field of Thai music to<br />
develop a dictionary of Thai music terms in English by listing all the different<br />
representations for each Thai music term<br />
This kind of analysis is time consuming, especially during the data<br />
collection and classification processes. It requires a high degree of patience and effort<br />
on the part of the researchers.<br />
66
LITERATURE CITED<br />
Assumption University. Thai art. (Online) Available: http://sunsite.au.ac.th/thailand/<br />
Thai_Arts/music.html, January 9, 2003<br />
Baker, M. 1992. A Coursebook on Translation. London: Routledge.<br />
Catford, J. 1965. The linguistic Theory of Translation. London: Oxford University<br />
Press.<br />
Kaewsuwan, T. 1988. The Analysis Cultural-Based Text Translation from Thai<br />
into English. Bangkok: Thesis, The National Institute of Development<br />
Administration.<br />
Larson, Mildred L. 1984. Meaning- Based Translation: A Guide to Aross-<br />
Language Equivalence. USA: University Press.<br />
Lize, B. Translating Culture. n.d. (Online) Available: http://ilze.org/semio/<br />
016.html, June 21, 2003<br />
Meemeskul Martin, Ruchirawan. 1985. Towards a Descriptive Model of Thai-<br />
English Translation. Dissertation Abstracts International.<br />
Morton, D. 1976. The Traditional Music of Thailand. Los Angeles: Institute of<br />
Ethnomusicology, UCLA.
Myers, M. 1998. Thai Music and Musicians in Contemporary Bangkok. Los<br />
Angeles: Institute of Ethnomusicology, UCLA.<br />
Newmark, P. 1988. A Textbook of Translation. New York and London:<br />
Prentice-Hall.<br />
Newmark, P. 1995. Approaches to Translation. Cambridge: Phoenix ELT.<br />
Nida, E. 1964. Towards a Science of Translating. Leiden: E. J. Brill.<br />
Nida, E and C. Taber. 1969. The theory and practice of Translation. Leiden:<br />
E. J. Brill.<br />
Pra Chen Duriyanga. 1968. Thai music. Bangkok.<br />
Pradipasen, Pradhak. 1976. Thai classical music. Bangkok.<br />
Ratchabanditayasathan. 1998. Saranukromsapdontrithai. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn<br />
University Press. (in Thai)<br />
Supol, D. 1999. Theories and Strategies of Translation. Bangkok. (in Thai)<br />
Vanessa, L. 2000. Equivalence in Translation: Between Myth and Reality.<br />
Translation Journal. (Online) Available: http://accurapid.com/journal/<br />
14equiv.htm, June 9, 2003.<br />
68
Wichaidist, S. 1977. The analysis of Western Musical Instrument Technical<br />
Terminology Translation in Thai Music Publishing. Bangkok: Research,<br />
The National Institute of Development Administration.<br />
Wisedsook, S. 2002. Translation Technique of Song Lyrics in Animation Films<br />
for Thai Versions as Translated by Tanee Poonsuwan. Bangkok: Thesis,<br />
Mahidol University.<br />
Yupho, D. 1987. Thai Musical Instruments. Bangkok.<br />
69
APPENDIX
<strong>Appendix</strong> A<br />
The Lists of Thai Music Terms
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 Lists of Thai Musical Instruments<br />
<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
1. กระจับป - krajappi (long-necked plucked lute; origin<br />
TMT<br />
2. กรับ<br />
unknown, name from, Sanskrit: names in the<br />
language of the culture form which they were<br />
borrowed were retained) (p.45), กระจับป<br />
(a<br />
plucked lute-type stringed instrument) (glossary)<br />
- kracappii (lute) (p.78), กระจับป<br />
(fretted lute-like<br />
instrument, strummed with a plectrum held in the<br />
peformer’s right hand. Not used in standard<br />
contemporary ensembles) (p.471)<br />
- gra jap pi (p. 50) (description with picture)<br />
- krap (rhythm sticks made from pieces of bamboo,<br />
cut and polished (p.44), กรับ a wooden percussion<br />
instrument; a pair is held in each hand (glossary)<br />
- grap (p.13)<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
3. กรับคู<br />
- grap khu (pair of grap) (p.13) TMI<br />
TMI<br />
72
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
4. กรับพวง - krap phuang (consists of several long thin sheets of TMT<br />
5. กรับเสภา<br />
metal alternated with thin pieces of wood) (p.102)<br />
กรับพวง (a percussion instrument of loose pieces<br />
tied together; held in the right hand and slapped<br />
against the palm of the left) (glossary)<br />
- grap phuang (cluster or bunch of grap) (p.14)<br />
- krap sepha (two nearly square bars of hardwood<br />
about one and a half inches wide on each side by<br />
eight inches long) (p.54) กรับเสภา (a wooden<br />
percussion instrument) (glossary)<br />
- krap seephaa กรับเสภา (pair of wooden bars, held<br />
in each hand of a performer. Clacked together to<br />
produce rhythmic accompaniment for recited epic<br />
genre, seephaa) (p.472)<br />
- grap say-pha- (p.14)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
73
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
6. กลอง - klong (drum) (p.44), กลอง (generic word for TMT<br />
7. กลองแขก<br />
“drum”) (glossary)<br />
- glaw-ng (drum) (p.35)<br />
- klong khaek (“foreign” or Indian drum) (p.45),<br />
กลองแขก (“foreign drum”) (glossary)<br />
- klaung kheek (pair of double-headed drums, held<br />
on laps of two separate players) (p.79) กลองแขก<br />
(cylindrical, two-headed drums held horizontally<br />
across performer’s laps. Leather heads are laced<br />
on. Played in pairs by two performers. Commonly<br />
substituted for taphoon in piiphaat ensembles and<br />
thoon/rammanaa in mahoorii and khrung saay<br />
ensembles) (p.471)<br />
- glong tahd<br />
- glaw-ng khae-k (p.48)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
74
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
8. กลองชนะ - klaung chana (drum similar to the klaung kheek but TMMC<br />
9. กลองชวา<br />
10. กลองชาตรี<br />
appearing in the rare pageant ensemble, tree sang<br />
klaung chana. Decorated in festive colors) (p.471)<br />
- glaw-ng chana (p.51)<br />
- klong chawa (Javanese drum) (p.73), กลองชวา<br />
(“Javanese drum” – that is, a Javanese-derived<br />
drum) (glossary)<br />
- glaw-ng cha wa- (Javanese drums) (p.48)<br />
- klong chatri (drum used in the southern theater<br />
(p.44), (a drum with pegged heads, like the klong<br />
that but much smaller –the body being about ten<br />
inches high, the heads about eight inches in<br />
diameter:104) (p.104), กลองชาตรี (a drum of<br />
southern Thailand) (glossary)<br />
- klaung chaatrii (p.112) , กลองชาตรี (goblet-<br />
shaped drum unique to the piiphaat chaatrii,<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
75<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
once used for the dramatic genre lakhaun chaatrii.<br />
11. กลองตะโพน<br />
That ensemble can also be called the “light”<br />
version of the small-sized piphaat ensemble, today<br />
accompanying southern-style ( “chaatrii” or<br />
“nooraa”) epic drama (p.470)<br />
- glaw-ng cha-tri (p.38)<br />
TMI<br />
- glaw-ng ta pho-n (two ta pho-n drums) (p.41) TMI<br />
12. กลองตุก<br />
- glaw-ng tuk (p.38) (5) TMI<br />
13. กลองทัด<br />
- klong that (p.72) กลองทัด (large barrel –shaped<br />
peg-headed drum) (glossary)<br />
- klaung that (pair of upright drums, hit with sticks)<br />
(p.79), กลองทัด (pair of drums played by single<br />
performer; hit with sticks. Heads tacked on.<br />
Appear in the piiphaat ensemble) (p.471)<br />
TMT<br />
76<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- the klong thad (a thick large drum) (p.14)<br />
TM<br />
14. กลองมะริกัน<br />
15. กลองมลายู<br />
(Approximate equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Timpani) (p.36)<br />
- glong tahd (twin drums) (p.26)<br />
- glaw-ng that (p.35)<br />
- klong marigan (American bass drum) (p.45),<br />
กลองมริกัน (American bass drum) (glossary)<br />
- glaw-ng mari gan (glaw-ng amay-ri gan or<br />
American drum) (p.63)<br />
- klong malayu (Malayan drum) (p.45), กลองมลายู<br />
(Malayan drum) (glossary)<br />
- klaung malaayuu (a drum similar appearance to the<br />
klaung kheek, and similarly played in pairs, Malay<br />
drum) (p.118), กลองมลายู (drums, played in pairs,<br />
similar glossaryearance to klaung kheek. Appear in<br />
the rare ensembles, wong bua lauy and wong<br />
piiphaat naang hong, both of which are used in<br />
cremation ceremonies) (p.471)<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
77<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
16. กลองยาว<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- glaw-ng mala-yu- (p.49) TMI<br />
17. กลองสองหนา<br />
- klong yao (long drum) (p.44) กลองยาว (long<br />
drum) (glossary)<br />
- glaw-ng yao- (p.58)<br />
- song na (literally, “two faces,” that is, a two-<br />
headed drum) (p.71), สองหนา (a medium-sized,<br />
hand-played drum) (glossary)<br />
- saung naa (lit “two -faced drums,” which replaces<br />
the taphoon in certain types of piiphaat ensemble<br />
repertoire) (p.79), สองหนา (lit” two faces”,<br />
referring to this drum’s two heads. Cylindrical<br />
shaped (in contrast to the barrel shape of the<br />
taphoon); often substituted for taphoon in the<br />
piiphaat ensemble serving as vocal<br />
accompaniment) (p.491)<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
78<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
18. เกราะ<br />
19. โกรง<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- the song na (a small long drum used in conjunction TM<br />
with other instruments, and also called Poeng<br />
Mang (เปงมาง when it is differently used for<br />
accompanying songs) (p.14)<br />
- saw-ng na (two drumheads) (p.55)<br />
- kro (small “slit drum” made from a piece of<br />
bamboo with nodes at each end (p.44), เกราะ an<br />
old bamboo percussion instrument<br />
- graw (p.9)<br />
- krong (large bamboo “slit drum,” several nodes in<br />
length (p.44), โกรง an old bamboo percussion<br />
instrument (glossary)<br />
- gro-ng (p.11)<br />
20. ขลุย<br />
- khlui (vertical bamboo flute with pegged<br />
mouthpiece) (p.77), ขลุย<br />
(the bamboo flute)<br />
(glossary)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
79
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
21. ขลุยกรวด<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- khluy (vertical flute. Different sizes and ranges are TMMC<br />
22. ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
indicated by noun modifiers) (p.79) ขลุย<br />
(vertically- held flute: appears in various named<br />
sizes, each of which is associated with a different<br />
mode or pitch level. Commonly used as a solo<br />
instrument, it also appears in khruang say<br />
ensemble, and in the “soft” version of piiphaat<br />
ensembles. Used in the public schools for music<br />
education.) (p.468)<br />
- khlui (flute types) (p.72)<br />
TMI<br />
- khlui grua-t (p.74) TMI<br />
- khlui phiang o (p.78) ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
(the medium –<br />
size bamboo flute) (glossary)<br />
- khuly piang au (p.97)<br />
- klui piang-or (a bamboo flute) (p.27)<br />
- khlui phia-ng aw- (the middle-sized khlui) (p.74)<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
80
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
23. ขลุยหลีบ<br />
- khlui lip (p.78) ขลุยหลีบ<br />
(the small –size bamboo TMT<br />
24. ขลุยอู<br />
25. ขิม<br />
flute) (glossary)<br />
- khluy lip (another size of flute) (p.97)<br />
- klui lib (a smaller and higher pitched bamboo<br />
flute) (p.27)<br />
- khlui-li-p (the smallest-sized khlui) (p.74)<br />
- khlui u (p.78) ขลุยอู<br />
(the large –size bamboo<br />
flute) (glossary)<br />
- khluy uu (p.83)<br />
- khlui-u- (the largest-sized khlui) (p.74)<br />
- khim ขิม (a zither –type stringed instrument = the<br />
Chinese yang ch’in) (glossary)<br />
- khim ขิม (hammered zither or dulcimer –like<br />
instrument, derived within last century from China<br />
and hence not a standard part of any ensemble; one<br />
informant cited the year 1924 for its introduction<br />
to Thailand. Popular with amateur<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
81<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
players and young students, the instrument can be<br />
performed solo or added to mahoorii and khruang<br />
saay ensembles) (p.467)<br />
26. ฆอง - khong (gong or gong- kettles) (p.44), ฆอง (a gong<br />
27. ฆองกระแต<br />
or gong-kettles) (glossary)<br />
- khaw-ng (gong) (p.25)<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
- khaw-ng gratae (p.28) (5) TMI<br />
28. ฆองกลาง - khong (wong) klang (“medium-sized” circle of<br />
29. ฆองคู<br />
gongs) (p.51)<br />
- medium gong set (p.27) (4)<br />
- khong khu (kettles similar to those used on the<br />
khong wong, fastened horizontally in a small<br />
rectangular box frame) (p.104), ฆองคู<br />
(a pair of<br />
gong- kettles) (glossary)<br />
- khaung khuu (a pair of small gongs set in a box)<br />
(p.112), ฆองคู<br />
(two kettle- shaped gongs inside a<br />
rectangular frame. Appears in the “light” version<br />
TMT<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
82<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
30. ฆองชัย<br />
31. ฆองมอญ<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
of the smallest size of piiphaat ensembles)<br />
32. ฆองมอญวงเล็ก<br />
(p.466)<br />
- khaw-ng khu- (a pair of gongs) (p.28)<br />
TMI<br />
- khaw-ng chai (p.27) (description with picture) (5) TMI<br />
- khong mon ฆองมอญ (gong –circle on a crescent-<br />
shaped rack) (glossary)<br />
- khaung maun ฆองมอญ (Mon gongs; set of tuned,<br />
kettle-shaped gongs, suspended on upright, u-<br />
shaped rack. Appears in the piiphaat maun)<br />
(p.466)<br />
- khaw-ng maw-n (p.33)<br />
- khaung maun lek (gong circle) (p. 116) (Mon<br />
gongs; set of tuned, kettle-shaped gongs,<br />
suspended on upright, u-shaped rack. Appears in<br />
the piiphaat maun, smaller, higher-pitched,<br />
melodically subordinate instrument) (p.466)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
83<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
33. ฆองระเบ็ง - khong rabeng (gong used for the rabeng, an ancient TMT<br />
type of vocal entertainment music) (p.44), ฆอง<br />
ระเบง (an old style gong) (glossary)<br />
- khaw-ng rabay-ng (p.29)<br />
34. ฆองราง - khong rang (eight kettles on a straight rack) (p.46)<br />
35. ฆองราว<br />
ฆองราง(row of gong –kettles on a rack) (glossary)<br />
- khaw-ng ra-ng (p.30)<br />
- khong rao or khong hui (set of gongs on a rack)<br />
(p.67), ฆองราว (set of gongs on a stand) (glossary)<br />
- khaung raaw (khaung huy) (p.124)<br />
- khaw-ng rao- (p.29)<br />
36. ฆองวง - khong wong (set or circle of gong-kettles on a<br />
stand) (p.44)<br />
- khaung wong ฆองวง (lit “gong circle”; circular<br />
rack of kettle –shaped, bossed gongs which lies<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
84<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
37. ฆองวงเล็ก<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
horizontally on the floor; performer sits inside the<br />
“circle.”. Played with two mallets. Fills important<br />
leadership role in piiphaat ensemble.) (p.466)<br />
- khong wong lek (small circle of gongs, a small set<br />
of gong-kettles) (p.50,51), ฆองวงเล็ก (small gong<br />
–circle) (glossary)<br />
- khaung wong lek (small gong- circle) (p.78), ฆอง<br />
วงเล็ก (lit “gong circle”; circular rack of kettle –<br />
shaped, bossed gongs which lies horizontally on<br />
the floor; performer sits inside the “circle.”.<br />
Played with two mallets. Fills important<br />
leadership role in piiphaat ensemble, smaller,<br />
higher-pitched, melodically subordinate<br />
instrument.) (p.466)<br />
- the gong wong lek Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; Celesta.) (p.36)<br />
(Celesta) (p.48,49)<br />
- small gong set (p.27)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
85
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- khaw-ng wong lek (small circle of gongs) (p.32) TMI<br />
38. ฆองวงใหญ<br />
- khong wong yai (large circle of gongs) (p.45), ฆอง<br />
วงใหญ (large gong- circle) (glossary)<br />
- khaung wong yai (large gong- circle) (p.78) , ฆอง<br />
วงใหญ (lit “gong circle”; circular rack of kettle –<br />
shaped, bossed gongs which lies horizontally on<br />
the floor; performer sits inside the “circle.”. Played<br />
with two mallets. Fills important leadership role in<br />
piiphaat ensemble, larger, lower-pitched,<br />
melodically dominant instrument.)( p.466)<br />
- the gong wong yai (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; Resonophone or<br />
Tubaphone or Glockenspiel.) (p.36) (Resonophone<br />
or Clockenspiel) (p.50)<br />
- big gong set (p. 26)<br />
- khaw-ng wong yai (large circle of gong) (p.32)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
86
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
39. ฆองหุย<br />
- khong rao or khong hui (set of three gongs on a TMT<br />
40. ฆองเหมง<br />
rack) (p.67), ฆองหุย<br />
(a gong on a tripod stand)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- huy or khaung huy หุย,<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
(set of 3, 5 or 7<br />
vertically –suspended gongs, used in piiphaat<br />
during certain epic episodes) (p.465)<br />
- the gong hooi (consisting of a set of 3,5, or 7<br />
gongs of different sizes, and therefore of different<br />
pitches) (p.14)<br />
- khaw-ng mui or khaw-ng hui (p.27)<br />
- khong meng (a small gong held up manually by a<br />
curved wooden handle from which it is suspended<br />
and struck with a piece of wood or a padded<br />
beater) (p.103) ฆองเหมง (a small, suspended,<br />
hand- held gong) (glossary)<br />
- khaung meeng ฆองเมง (small gong, suspended<br />
manually and hit with a mallet or stick. Appeared<br />
in historical ensembles) (p.466)<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
87<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
41. ฆองโหมง<br />
42. จะเข<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- khaw-ng may-ng (p.27) TMI<br />
- khaw-ng mo-ng (p.26) TMI<br />
- chakae (“crocodile”, a three-stringed floor zither, a<br />
zither –type instrument) (p.44), จะเข (a zither-type<br />
stringed instrument) (glossary)<br />
- chakhee (zither) (p.78) (fretted zither-type<br />
instrument has three stings which are plucked with<br />
a plectrum tied to the performer’s right hand. The<br />
instrument lies horizontally on the floor. Appears<br />
in mahoorii and khruang saay ensembles, and is<br />
popular as a solo instrument) (p.461)<br />
- jakay (s) (a medium size plucked string<br />
instrument) (p.27)<br />
- jakhay- (p.102)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
88
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
43. ฉาบ - chap (medium-sized metal hand cymbals) (p.44) TMT<br />
44. ฉาบเล็ก<br />
- chaap ฉาบ (pair of metal hand –cymbals, larger<br />
than the ching and somewhat flatter. Used to<br />
emphasize important metric pulses in larger<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.462)<br />
- cha-p (a pair of small metal cymbals) (p.24)<br />
- chap lek (a pair of medium-sized cymbals of flat<br />
metal with a central rounded boss about three-<br />
quarters of an inch deep) (p.66), ฉับเล็ก (medium –<br />
size cymbals) (glossary)<br />
- chaap lek (hand cymbals) (p.117), ฉาบเล็ก (pair of<br />
metal hand-cymbals, larger than the ching and<br />
somewhat flatter. Used to emphasize important<br />
metric pulses in larger piiphaat ensembles, smaller<br />
sized, used more frequently) (p.462)<br />
- the charb lek (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Small cymbals) (p.36)<br />
(Medium cymbals) (p.50)<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
89
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
45. ฉาบใหญ<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- cymbals<br />
TCM<br />
- cha-p lek (p.24)<br />
- chap yai (p.67) ฉับใหญ (large –size cymbals)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- chaap yay ฉาบใหญ (pair of metal hand-cymbals,<br />
larger than the ching and somewhat flatter. Used to<br />
emphasize important metric pulses in larger<br />
piiphaat ensembles, larger size) (p.462)<br />
- the charb yai, (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Large cymbals) (p.36)<br />
(Large cymbals) (p.50)<br />
- cymbals<br />
- cha-p yai (p.24)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
90
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
46. ฉิ่ง<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- ching (small metal hand cymbals) (p.44) , (a pair TMT<br />
of cymbals made of thick metal and shaped like<br />
teacups or small hollow cones.) (p.64), (small hand<br />
cymbals) (p.65) , ฉิ่ง<br />
(small hand cymbals)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- ching (small metal hand –cymbals) (p.79),<br />
(cymbals) (p.117) , ฉิ่ง<br />
(small metal hand-cymbals,<br />
ubiquitous in Thai classical music. Mark important<br />
metric pluses which indicate chan.) (p.464)<br />
- the ching (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Triangle) (p.36) (Small<br />
cymbals) (p.48,50)<br />
- ching (small cymbals) (4)<br />
- ching (a pair of cymbals) (p.23)<br />
47. ซอ - so (generic term for bowed stringed instruments)<br />
(p.44) ,ซอ (a generic term for bowed stringed<br />
instruments) (glossary)<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
91
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
48. ซอดวง - so duang (p.100)ซอดวง (a stringed instrument --- TMT<br />
two –stringed bowed lute with cylindrical<br />
resinator) (glossary)<br />
- sau duang – (higher-pitched 2- stringed fiddle)<br />
(p.78),ซอดวง (higher –pitched and melodically<br />
dominant of the two-stringed fiddles. Resonating<br />
body made of hardwood cylinder, with snake-skin<br />
face. In contrast to Western fiddle –type<br />
instruments, the strings are not depressed against a<br />
fingerboard to produce pitches. Bow “attached” to<br />
in strument by being strung through the in<br />
strument’s strings) (p.491)<br />
- saw duang (s) (a two-string solo fiddle) (p.26)<br />
- saw- dua-ng (p.111)<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
92
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
49. ซอสามสาย - so sam sai (bowed, three-stringed instrument) TMT<br />
50. ซอสามสายหลีบ<br />
(p.44),ซอสามสาม (a stringed instrument ---three –<br />
stringed bowed lute with triangular sound box)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- sau saam saay (3 –stringed fiddle) (p.78) , ซอสาม<br />
สาย (three-stringed fiddle, used in mahoorii<br />
ensembles and in solo, and solo plus vocal,<br />
repetoire. Heart-shaped body stands on a peg.<br />
Body of wood, face of leather. Unlike the sau<br />
duang and sau uu, the bow is no “atttached.”)<br />
(p.491)<br />
- saw sam sai (a three-string fiddle with higher<br />
pitches) (p.27)<br />
- saw-sa-m sai (p.105)<br />
- sau saam saay lip (p.99)<br />
- saw sam sai lib (a smaller three-string fiddle with<br />
higher pitches) (p.27)<br />
- saw –li-p (small size saw) (p.109)<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
93
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
51. ซออู<br />
- so u (the bowed stringed instrument with a sound TMT<br />
box (resonating chamber or disphram) made from<br />
half an ordinary coconut shell) (p.97), ซออู<br />
(a<br />
string instrument ---two –stringed bowed lute with<br />
half coconut shell sound box) (glossary)<br />
- sau uu (lower –pitched 2-stringed fiddle) (p.78),<br />
ซออู<br />
(lower pitched and melodically subordinate of<br />
the two-stringed fiddles. Resonating body made of<br />
coconut shell, with leather face; sound-holes<br />
carved into back. Bow is “attached” as on sau<br />
duang) (p.491)<br />
- saw oo (s) (a two-string accompanying fiddle)<br />
(p.27)<br />
- saw –u- (p.109)<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
94
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
52. ตะโพน - taphon (the main drum used in the pi phat<br />
TMT<br />
(percussion) ensemble) (p.68) (a barrel-shaped<br />
drum on a stand) (glossary)<br />
- taphoon (double headed drum. “the most important<br />
rhythm instrument.” (p.79) ตะโพน (two headed<br />
barrel shaped drum used in piiphaat ensemble. Ash<br />
and rice mixture applied to lower head for tuning.<br />
Heads tuned to an interval of approximately one<br />
fifth, but not tuned definitely in relation to<br />
ensemble. Of ritual significance, and not played by<br />
females) (p.493)<br />
- the tapone (a kind of hand timpano with drum-<br />
heads covering both ends) (p.14) (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western instrument; small<br />
hand tympano) (p.36) (small hand tympano)<br />
(p.48,50)<br />
- tapohn (two-sided drum) (p.26)<br />
- ta-pho-n (p.39)<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
95
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
53. ตะโพนมอญ - taphon mon taphon mon (p.69), ตะโพนมอญ (the TMT<br />
mon model of the taphon) (glossary)<br />
- taphoon maun (two-sided drum) (p.117)<br />
- ta pho-n maw-n (p.40)<br />
TMMC<br />
54. แตร - trae- (p.89) TMI<br />
55. แตรงอน - tree ngaun (trumpets made from animal horns)<br />
(p.116, 496)<br />
- trae-ngaw-n (curved trumpet) (p.89)<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
56. แตรฝรั่ง<br />
- trae-farang (European trumpet) (p.91) TMI<br />
57. แตรลางโพง - trae- la-ng pho-ng (p.91) TMI<br />
58. แตรลําโพง - trae-lam pho-ng (p.91) TMI<br />
59. แตรวิลันดา - trae-wilanda- (p.91) TMI<br />
60. ทับ - tho-n or thap (p.42) TMI<br />
61. โทน - thon (goblet or vase drum; India, from “dhol”?)<br />
(p.45), โทน (a goblet or inverted vase-shaped<br />
drum with a single head) (glossary)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
96
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
62. โทนชาตรี<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- thoon (goblet-shaped drum, leather head laced on, TMMC<br />
usually played simultaneously by one person, and<br />
conceived of as one unit musically. Hence they are<br />
referred to in conjunction, thoon/rammanaa.)<br />
(p.79), โทน (goblet-shaped drum with ceramic<br />
body, leather head laced on. Paired with<br />
rammanaa and played by a single musician, for<br />
the rhythmic parts of the two form one pattern.<br />
Sometimes called thoon mahoorii to distinguish<br />
from below (below describes thoon chatrii)<br />
(p.495)<br />
- tohn (p.27)<br />
- tho-n or thap (p.42)<br />
- thon chatri (p.76) โทนชาตรี (a drum of south<br />
Thailand ; small-size klong that) (glossary)<br />
- thoon chaatrii (p.112), โทนชาตรี (similar to above<br />
but played in pairs in southern Thailand to<br />
accompany shadow theater and lakhaun nooraa<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
97<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
(p.495) Remarks: the word “above” refers<br />
“goblet-shaped drum with ceramic body, leather<br />
head laced on. Paired with rammanaa and played<br />
by a single musician, for the rhythmic parts of the<br />
two form one pattern. Sometimes called thoon<br />
mahoorii”, which describes thoon<br />
- tho-n cha-tri- (p.43)<br />
63. โทนมโหรี - thon mahori โทนมโหรี (the thon drum used in the<br />
64. บัณเฑาะว<br />
mahori ensemble) (glossary)<br />
- tho-n maho-ri- (p.43)<br />
- bando (small hourglass drum; India; Pali:<br />
“panawa) (p.45), บัณเฑาะว (a small, hand drum)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- banthau (a small two –faced, hand-held drum)<br />
(p.116), บัณเฑาะว (a percussion instrument. Two<br />
drumheads attached to a stick, sounded by balls<br />
attached to strings when rolled between the hands)<br />
(p.460)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
98<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- ban daw (p.33) (description with picture) (5) TMI<br />
65. ป<br />
- pi (p.78) ป<br />
(double-reed instrument) (glossary)<br />
66. ปกลาง<br />
- pii (oboe-like double –reed instruments of various<br />
sizes and ranges. Different types are in dicated by<br />
ensenbles) (p.79), ป<br />
(oboe-like reed instruments,<br />
used in piiphaat ensembles. Various sizes have<br />
different ranges of pitch, and occur in different<br />
musical contexts) (p.485)<br />
- pi (reed or oboe types) (p.75)<br />
- pi klang (about fifteen inches long, one and a half<br />
inches in diameter) (p.79), ปกลาง<br />
( medium –<br />
sized pi) (glossary)<br />
- pii klaang ปกลาง<br />
(“medium” pii, according to<br />
Morton used to accompany shadow theater<br />
(1976:79) (p.485)<br />
- pi –gla-ng (p.77)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
99
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
67. ปไฉน<br />
- pi chanai (double –reed instrument, body with TMT<br />
conical bore, about a foot long or less; India)<br />
(p.45), ปไฉน<br />
(early double-reed instrument)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- pii chanay ปไฉน<br />
(pii chanay (rarely used today,<br />
but formerly used in processions. Small and high-<br />
pitched) (p.485)<br />
- pi-cha nai (p.84)<br />
68. ปชวา<br />
- pi chawa (Javanese “oboe”) (p.89), ปชวา<br />
(“Javanese pi”) (glossary)<br />
- pii chaawaa ปชวา<br />
(“Javanese” pii , appears in<br />
certain specail ensembles, including the piiphaat<br />
naang hong, and the wong khruang saay pii<br />
chaawaa. Also used in certain dance-drama<br />
contexts, and along with klaung kheek, to<br />
accompany Thai boxing) (p.485)<br />
- pi-chawa- (p.86)<br />
100<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
69. ปนอก<br />
- pi nok (outdoor pi) (p.79), ปนอก<br />
(outdoor pi) TMT<br />
70. ปใน<br />
(glossary)<br />
- pii nauk (the “outside” pii, associated with lakhaun<br />
nauk (“outside” dance-drama_ performed outside<br />
of the royal palace. Shorter in length than the pii<br />
nay) (p.485)<br />
- pi-nok (p.26)<br />
- pi –naw-k (p.77)<br />
- pi nai (indoor pi) (p.79), ปใน<br />
(indoor pi)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- pii nay ปใน<br />
(the “inside” pii, because it was<br />
associated with the khoon (masked dance-drama)<br />
and lakhaun nay (“inside” dance-drama) once<br />
confined to the palaces. This is the instrument<br />
usually referred to simply as pii) (p.485)<br />
- the pi nai (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Oboe or Piano-accordion or C<br />
Clarinet) (p.36) (Oboe) (p.48)<br />
101<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TM
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
71. ปมอญ<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- pi-nai (p.26)<br />
TCM<br />
- pi-nai (p.77)<br />
- pi mon ปมอญ<br />
(mon –style pi) (glossary)<br />
- pii maun (oboe) (p.116), ปมอญ<br />
(“Mon” pii, used<br />
only in the piiphaat maun. Conical shape) (p.485)<br />
- pi-maw-n (p.88)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
102<br />
TMMC<br />
72. ปหอ<br />
- pi-haw- (p.87) TMI<br />
73. ปออ<br />
- pi-aw- (p.78) TMI<br />
74. เปงมาง - poeng mang (p.113) เปงมาง (a small, thong –<br />
wrapped barrel –shaped drum) (glossary)<br />
- per-ng ma-ng (p.52)<br />
75. เปงมางคอก - poeng mang khok (p.113) เปงมางคอก (a set of<br />
drum on their stand) (glossary)<br />
- peeng maang khauk (circle of tuned drums)<br />
(p.117), เปงมางคอก (set of seven tuned drums<br />
(each a peeng maang) arranged vertically in a<br />
semicircular frame, used in the piiphaat maun<br />
ensemble) (p.480)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
76. พิณ<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- per-ng ma-ng khaw-k (a group of seven per-ng ma- TMI<br />
ng drums) (p.54)<br />
- phin (stick zither with one string and a half-gourd<br />
resonator; India, from Sanskrit:, Indian names for a<br />
plucked lute: vina (south India) and bina (north<br />
India)) (p.45), พิณ (a stick zither –type stringed<br />
instrument) (glossary)<br />
- phin (plucked lute-type instruments. Morton<br />
explains that in former times the word was a cover<br />
term for all lute-type instrument (1976:91).<br />
Today, it usually appears in the names of several<br />
folk instruments. In my experience, phin alone<br />
referred to a lute-type instrument associated with<br />
Northern Thai folk music and occasionally used in<br />
folk-influenced urban pop music. (p.481)<br />
- phi-n (p.93) (description) (5)<br />
TMT<br />
103<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
77. พิณน้ําเตา<br />
- phin nam tao (p.91) พิณน้ําเตา<br />
(a type of phin) TMT<br />
(glossary)<br />
- phi-n nam tao (a stringed instrument made from a<br />
bottle gourd) (p.93)<br />
78. พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
- phia (stick zither with four strings, the stick<br />
79. มโหระทึก<br />
attached to a half –gourd chest resonator, which is<br />
placed against the vare chest of the performer<br />
during performance) (p.44) พิณเพียะ (a type of<br />
phin) (glossary)<br />
- phi-n phia (p.96 )<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
- maho-ra therk (p.64) TMI<br />
104
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
80. ระนาด - ranat (xylophone – set of wooden keys on a stand) TMT<br />
(p.44)<br />
- ranad (a wooden xylophone) (p.26)<br />
81. ระนาดทอง - ranat thong (p.62), ระนาดทอง (a metallophone ;<br />
original name of the ranat ek lek) (glossary)<br />
- rana-t thaw-ng or rana-t ay-k lek (p.20)<br />
82. ระนาดทุม<br />
- ranat thum (p.57) ระนาดทุม<br />
(low –pitched<br />
xylophone) ( glossary)<br />
- ranaat thum (ranaat is xylophone; thum translated<br />
to be low or deep in tone) (p.78), (xylophone)<br />
(p.116), ระนาดทุม<br />
(lower –pitched and<br />
melodically subordinate of the wooden –keyed<br />
xylophones; actually, the keys may be made of<br />
bamboo. Wooden body is narrow and rectangular,<br />
box-like compared to the ranaat eek.) (p.488)<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
105<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- ranad thume or thume mai (Approximate<br />
TM<br />
equivalents among the Western instrument; Alto<br />
Xylophone with wooden-resonance bars or<br />
Marimba) (p.36) (Xylophone alto or Marimba)<br />
(p.48,49)<br />
- ranad toom (p.26)<br />
83. ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
- ranat thum lek (p.63) ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
(low-pitched<br />
metallophone ) (glossary)<br />
- ranaat thum lek , (lek is iron; these iron-keyed<br />
xylophones are musical partners to the wooden<br />
ones above, and used only in the larger-sized<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.78) , ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
(metal keyed version, used in the larger piiphaat<br />
ensembles.) (p.488)<br />
- ranad thong thume or thume lek (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western instrument; Alto<br />
Xylophone with steel-resonance bars) (p.36)<br />
(Resonophone alto) (p.48,49)<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
106<br />
TMMC<br />
TM
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- ranad toom lek (with metal keys) (p.26)<br />
TCM<br />
- rana-t thum lek (p.21) (description)<br />
84. ระนาดเอก - ranat ek (a xylophone with a boat-shaped<br />
resonating box supported on a small pedistal)<br />
(p.54) , ระนาดเอก (high –pitched xylophone)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- ranaat eek (ranaat is xylophone; eek means first, or<br />
one) (p.78), (xylophone) (p.116), ระนาดเอก<br />
(higher pitched and melodically dominant wooden<br />
–keyed xylophone, played with pair of mallets.<br />
Wooden body is boat-shaped) (p.488)<br />
- the ranad ek (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Treble Xylophone with<br />
wooden-resonamce bars (p.36) , (Xylophone,<br />
treble) (p.48,50)<br />
- ranad ek (p.26)<br />
- rana-t ay-k (p.15)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
107<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
85. ระนาดเอกทอง - ranad thong ek or thume lek (Approximate<br />
TM<br />
equivalents among the Western instrument; Treble<br />
Xylophone with steel- resonance bars) (p.36)<br />
86. ระนาดเอกเหล็ก - ranat ek lek or ranat thong (iron ranat ek) (p.62),<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก (high-pitched metallophone)<br />
(glossary)<br />
- ranaat eek lek (lek is iron; these iron-keyed<br />
xylophones are musical partners to the wooden<br />
ones above, and used only in the larger-sized<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.78), ระนาดเอกเหล็ก<br />
(metal-keyed version, included in the larger<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.488)<br />
- ranad ek lek (with metal keys) (p.26)<br />
- rana-t thaw-ng or rana-t ay-k lek (p.20)<br />
87. รํามะนา - rammana (a shallow frame drum with one head,<br />
about the size of a Western tambourine but without<br />
the “jangles.”) (p.77) รํามะนา (a small frame<br />
drum) (glossary)<br />
TMT<br />
108<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- rammanaa (a frame drum, usually played<br />
TMMC<br />
simultaneously by one person, and conceived of as<br />
one unit musically. Hence they are referred to in<br />
conjunction, thoon/rammanaa) (p.79), รํามะนา<br />
(frame drum, with shallow wooden (sometimes<br />
ivory) body. Leather head is tacked on. Paired with<br />
thoon and played by a single musician, for the<br />
rhythmic parts of the two form one pattern) (p.487)<br />
- ramana (a small hand drum) (p.27)<br />
- ram mana- (p.46)<br />
88. วงฆองชัย - wong khaung chay (a set of seven vertically-<br />
suspended gongs, the gong pitches outline the<br />
main melodic pitches of songs) (p.110) , วงฆองชัย<br />
(circular rack of vertically suspended gongs, of<br />
different sizes and pitches, used in the piiphaat<br />
dukdamban enesmble) (p.497)<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
109<br />
TMMC
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 1 (Continued)<br />
89. โหมง<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- wong khaw-ng chai (circle of khaw-ng chai TMI<br />
gongs)(p.35)<br />
- mong (p.67)โหมง (a large gong) (glossary)<br />
- moong or khaung moong (suspended gong) (p.117)<br />
(ฆอง) โหมง (metal gong suspended from tripod.<br />
Appears in some of the larger sized standard<br />
ensembles) (p.476)<br />
- the mong (Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; No equivalent except perhaps<br />
tom-tom or gong) (p.36) (Large Gong) (p.48,50)<br />
- mong (picture)<br />
- mong (p.26)<br />
TMT<br />
110<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 Lists of Thai classical musical ensembles<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
1. ปพาทยรามัญ<br />
- pi-pha-t ra-man (p.34) TMI<br />
2. วงกลองแขก - klong khaek ensemble (p.102) TMT<br />
3. วงกลองแขกปชวา<br />
- pi- chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ngkhae-k pi-<br />
chawa- (p.87)<br />
4. วงขับไม - khap mai ensemble (literally “to recite or sing<br />
with a beat” or more figuratively “to perform on<br />
musical instruments.”) (p.101) ขับไม (an old<br />
ensemble) (glossary)<br />
- khap may or wong khap may (a three-stringed<br />
fiddle, vocalist, and small two-faced hand-held<br />
drum called banthau) (p.116), (วง) ขับไม<br />
(historical ensemble—today played occasionally<br />
by university students—consisting of solo<br />
vocalist, sau saam saay, and banthau) (p.465)<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
111
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
5. วงเครื่องสาย<br />
- khruang sai เครื่องสาย<br />
(the ensemble composed TMT<br />
6. วงเครื่องสาย<br />
เครื่องคู<br />
of stringed instruments , flute, and rhythmic<br />
percussion) (glossary)<br />
- wong khruang saay (an ensemble of stringed<br />
instruments(this is what its name refers to<br />
literally), drums and hand cymbals (Morton’s<br />
“rhythmic percussion”), and khluy or flute) (p.91),<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
(wong khruang saay- ensemble of<br />
stringed instruments.) (p.469)<br />
- the string ensemble (p.26)<br />
- khrer-a-ng sai- (string) ensemble (p.43,47)<br />
- medium-sized or doubled khruang sai ensemble<br />
(p.108) , medium-sized or doubled ensemble<br />
(p.111)<br />
- wong khruang saay khruang khuu (medium-sized<br />
(lit. paired) ensemble of string instruments)<br />
(p.102), เครื่องคู<br />
(lit. “instruments; paired”; term<br />
added to conventional ensembles to indicate<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
112
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
7. วงเครื่องสายวง<br />
เล็ก<br />
medium size or type of instrumentation) (p.469)<br />
- wong khre-a-ng sai, khre-a-ng khu (“doubled”<br />
string ensemble: another instrument of each kind<br />
is added, making a pair.)<br />
- small khruang sai ensemble (p.108), small<br />
ensemble (p.111)<br />
- wong khre-a-ng sai wong lek ( small string<br />
ensemble; one instrument of each kind only<br />
is used compable to the pi-phat khre-a-ng ha)<br />
8. วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
- khruang saay pii chaawaa, wong khruang saay pii<br />
9. วงเครื่องสายผสม<br />
ไวโอลิน<br />
10. วงเถิดเทิง,<br />
วงเทิงบองกลองยาว<br />
chaawaa (a standard type of stringed ensemble<br />
with pii chaawaa added. Known for requiring<br />
very skillful, masterful pii player.) (p.469)<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
TCM<br />
TMMC<br />
- wong khruang saay prasom violin (p.121) TMMC<br />
- ther-t ther-ng or ther-ng baw-ng glaw-ng yao-<br />
(p.60)<br />
TMI<br />
113
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
11. วงบัวลอย - bua loi (an old ensemble) (glossary)<br />
TMT<br />
- bua lauy or wong bua lauy (floating lotus<br />
ensemble) (p.116), (วง) บัวลอย (ensemble rarely<br />
performed today, but intended for use in<br />
cremation ceremonies for royalty, and has its own<br />
specific repertoire. Consists of pii chaawaa and<br />
rhythmic accompaniment. Morton views this as<br />
the precursor to the wong piiphaat naang hong)<br />
(p.460)<br />
- bua law-i ensemble (description) (p.50)<br />
12. วงปชวากลองแขก<br />
- pi-chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ng khae-k pi<br />
chawa (p.87)<br />
13. วงปพาทย<br />
- pi phat (the ensemble using melodic and rhythmic<br />
percussion) (p.104) ปพาทย<br />
(an ensemble<br />
composed of melodic and rhythmic percussion<br />
instruments and the pi) (glossary)<br />
- piiphaat or wong piiphaat (an ensemble of<br />
percussion instruments and the pii or oboe) (p.91),<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
114
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
(melodic percussive ensemble, which<br />
Source<br />
does not include stringed instruments.<br />
Accompanies rituals and theatrical genres but can<br />
also perform entertainment music) (p.486)<br />
- piphat band (p.3)<br />
- the pi-paht ensemble (p.26)<br />
- pi-pha-t (percussion) emsemble (p.43)<br />
14. วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
- khruang khu (medium-sized or doubled<br />
ensemble ,a pair of instruments, medium-sized or<br />
doubled piphat ensemble) (p.105,107)<br />
- wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng khu (medium size,<br />
“khruang khuu” (lit. instruments/pair) (p.96)<br />
เครื่องคู<br />
(lit. “instruments; paired”; term added to<br />
conventional ensembles to indicate medium size<br />
or type of instrumentation) (p.469)<br />
- wong pi-phat khre-a-ng khu (medium sized<br />
precussion ensemble another instrument of each<br />
kind is added, making a pair; a "double<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
115
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
15. วงปพาทยเครื่อง<br />
หา<br />
16. วงปพาทยเครื่อง<br />
ใหญ<br />
ensemble.)<br />
- khruang ha (literally, “five instruments) (p.105)<br />
เครื่องหา<br />
(a small ensemble ---“of five<br />
instruments”) (glossary)<br />
- khruang haa (small size, “khruang haa” (lit.<br />
instruments/five) (p.95) , (the five –instrument or<br />
small sized piiphaat ensemble) (p.112) , เครื่องหา<br />
(lit. “instruments/five”; term added to<br />
conventional ensembles to indicate small size or<br />
type of instrumentation) (p.469)<br />
- wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng ha (small percussion<br />
ensemble consisting of five instruments and the<br />
Ching)<br />
- khruang yai (large ensemble, literally, “large<br />
group of instruments, large pi phat ensemble)<br />
(p.105, 107)<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
116
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- khruang yay (large size. “khruang yay” (lit. TMMC<br />
“instrument/large)) (p.96) , เครื่องใหญ<br />
(lit.<br />
“instruments/large”; term added to conventional<br />
ensembles to indicate large size or type of<br />
instrumentation) (p.469)<br />
- wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng yai (large percussion<br />
ensemble; all the important percussion<br />
instruments are included)<br />
17. วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
- wong piiphaat chaatrii (specialized ensemble)<br />
18. วงปพาทยดึกดํา<br />
บรรพ<br />
(p.486)<br />
- pi- pha-t cha-tri- ensemble (p.43)<br />
- wong piiphaat dukdamban (วง) ปพาทยดึกดํา<br />
บรรพ (ensemble which accompanies the dramatic<br />
genre, lakhaun dukdamban, one of several<br />
innovatiove forms developed largely by Prince<br />
Naris in the time of King Chulalongkorn, late 19 th<br />
century. A distinctive feature of this ensemble is<br />
the wong khaung chay, seven tuned gongs<br />
TCM<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
117
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
vertically suspended in a frame. Which does not<br />
appear in any other Thai ensembles) (p.486)<br />
- wong pi-phat, duk-dam-bun<br />
- pi-pha-t derk dam-ban (p. 34)<br />
19. วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
- pi phat nang hong ensemble (p.112) , pi phat nang<br />
hong ปพาทยนางหงส<br />
(the pi phat funeral<br />
ensemble) (glossary)<br />
- wong piiphaat naang hong (วง) ปพาทยนางหงส<br />
(ensemble formerly used in cremation<br />
ceremonies, but rare today) (p.486)<br />
- pi-pha-t na-ng hong ensemble (p.50,87)<br />
20. วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
- pi phat mon ensemble (p.113)<br />
- wong piiphaat maun (p.116) (วง) ปพาทยมอญ<br />
(the Mon-derived ensemble (which shares certain<br />
similarities to Burmese ensembles) commonly<br />
played at cremation ceremonies. Features Mon-<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
118
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
derived versions of the regular piiphaat<br />
instruments, plus the set of tuned drums, peeng<br />
maang khauk) (p.486)<br />
- pi-pha-t maw-n (p.34)<br />
<br />
21. วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
เครื่องคู<br />
- piiphaat maun khruang khuu (p.116) TMMC<br />
22. วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
- pi phat mai nuam (the pi phat ensemble using TMT<br />
padded sticks) (glossary)<br />
- may nuam (p.111) , ไมนวม (lit. “stick/ soft”;<br />
indicates the “soft” version of piiphaat) (p.476)<br />
- pi-pha-t mainuam ensemble (p.41)<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
23. วงปพาทยอยางเบา<br />
- light pi phat (p.104) TMT<br />
24. วงปพาทยอยาง<br />
หนัก<br />
TMI<br />
- heavy pi phat (p.104) TMT<br />
25. วงมโหรี - mahori มโหรี (an ensemble composed of melodic<br />
and rhythmic percussion instruments and flute)<br />
(glossary)<br />
TMT<br />
119
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
- mahoorii (wong) mahoorii (….actually a<br />
TMMC<br />
combination of khruang saay and piiphaat<br />
ensembles”; Jearadithaporn ibid:4: cf. Morton<br />
ibid:105 as well) (p.91), วงมโหรี (a standard type<br />
of ensemble, including both stringed and melodic<br />
percussive instruments. Ideally characterized by<br />
instruments of smaller size than those commonly<br />
used in piiphaat ensembles) (p.476)<br />
- the mahori ensemble (p.26)<br />
- maho-ri- (mixed string and percussion)ensemble<br />
(p.43,47)<br />
26. วงมโหรีเครื่องคู<br />
- medium sized or doubled mahori ensemble<br />
(p.109) , medium sized or doubled ensemble<br />
(p.111)<br />
TCM<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
120
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 2 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
27. วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
- small mahori ensemble (p.109), small ensemble TMT<br />
(p.111)<br />
- wong mahori khre-a-ng lek (small ensemble<br />
consisting of both string and percussion type<br />
instruments)<br />
28. วงมโหรีเครื่องสี่<br />
- original mahori (p.102)<br />
- wong mahori boran or ancient mahori<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
TCM<br />
29. วงมโหรีเครื่องหก<br />
- wong mahori khre-a-ag hok TCM<br />
30. วงมโหรีเครื่อง<br />
ใหญ<br />
- large mahori ensemble (p.110), large ensemble<br />
(p.111)<br />
TMT<br />
121
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 3 Lists of Types of Thai musical instruments<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
1. เครื่องกํากับจังหวะ<br />
- rhythmic instruments (p.13)<br />
TM<br />
- rhythmic instruments (p.26)<br />
2. เครื่องดีด<br />
- plucked (p.91)<br />
3. เครื่องดําเนิน<br />
ทํานอง<br />
- khruang diit (plucked instruments) (p.78)<br />
- plucked stringed instruments (p.93)<br />
- melodic instruments (p.13)<br />
- melodic instruments (p.26)<br />
4. เครื่องตี<br />
- khruang tii (hit or beaten instruments) (p.78)<br />
- percussion section (13)<br />
- percussion instruments (p.8)<br />
TCM<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TM<br />
TCM<br />
TMMC<br />
5. เครื่องตีกํากับ<br />
จังหวะ<br />
- rhythmic percussion (p.64) TMT<br />
6. เครื่องตีดําเนิน<br />
ทํานอง<br />
- melodic percussion (p.45) TMT<br />
7. เครื่องเปา<br />
- woodwinds (p.78)<br />
TMT<br />
- khruang paw (blown instruments) (p.79)<br />
- wood-wind section (13)<br />
- wind instruments (p.71)<br />
TM<br />
TMI<br />
TMMC<br />
TM<br />
TMI<br />
122
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 3 (Continued)<br />
Thai term Representation Source<br />
8. เครื่องสาย<br />
- stringed instruments (p.91)<br />
TMT<br />
- strings (p.80)<br />
- stringed instruments (p.93)<br />
9. เครื่องสี<br />
- bowed (p.94)<br />
- khruang sii (bowed instruments) (p.78)<br />
- bowed stringed instruments (p.104)<br />
TMMC<br />
TMI<br />
TMT<br />
TMMC<br />
10. เครื่องหนัง<br />
- percussion instruments using skin or leather (p.35) TMI<br />
TMI<br />
123
<strong>Appendix</strong> B<br />
Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms of Thai Music
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms of Thai Musical Instruments<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
<br />
<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
กระจับป TMT krajapppi (long-necked plucked lute;<br />
origin unknown, name from<br />
Sanskrit:) (p.45)<br />
กระจับป (a plucked lute-type stringed<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Description strategies<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
occasion it is played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
instrument) (glossary) <br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ implements<br />
used<br />
in playing, picture<br />
กระจับป TMMC kracappii (lute) (p.78)<br />
กระจับป (fretted lute-like instrument,<br />
strummed with a plectrum held in the<br />
peformer’s right hand. Not used in<br />
standard contemporary<br />
type of name<br />
ensembles) (p.471) <br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
125
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
กระจับป<br />
TMI gra jap pi (p.50)<br />
จะเข TMT<br />
chakae (“crocodile”, a three-stringed<br />
floor zither, a zither –type<br />
instrument) (p.44)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
จะเข (a zither-type stringed<br />
instrument) (glossary) <br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, pitch, picture<br />
จะเข TMMC chakhee (zither) (p.78) type of name<br />
จะเข (fretted zither-type instrument<br />
has three stings which are plucked<br />
with a plectrum tied to the<br />
performer’s right hand. The<br />
instrument lies horizontally on the<br />
floor. Appears in mahoorii and<br />
khruang saay ensembles, and is<br />
popular as a solo instrument) (p.461) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
position in ensemble,<br />
picture<br />
126
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
จะเข TCM jakay (s) (a medium size plucked<br />
string instrument) (p.27) <br />
จะเข TMI jakhay- (p.102)<br />
พิณ TMT phin (stick zither with one string and<br />
a half-gourd resonator ; India, from<br />
Sanskrit: Indian names for a plucked<br />
lute: vina (south India) and bina<br />
(north India)) (p.45)<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
พิณ (a stick zither –type stringed<br />
instrument) (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used, how it<br />
is played, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
compare with other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
127
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
พิณ TMMC phin (plucked lute-type instruments.<br />
Morton explains that in former times<br />
the word was a cover term for all lutetype<br />
instrument (1976:91). Today, it<br />
usually appears in the names of<br />
several folk instruments. In my<br />
experience, phin alone referred to a<br />
lute-type instrument associated with<br />
Northern Thai folk music and<br />
occasionally used in folk-influenced<br />
urban pop music. (p.481) <br />
พิณ TMI phi-n (p.93) history<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
TMT phin nam tao(p. 91) picture<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
(a Type of phin) (glossary) <br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Description strategies<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
128
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
TMI phi-n nam tao (a stringed instrument<br />
made from a bottle gourd)(p.93)<br />
พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
TMT<br />
พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
TMI phi-n phia (p.96 )<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
phia (stick zither with four strings,<br />
the stick attached to a half –gourd<br />
chest resonator, which is placed<br />
against the vare chest of the<br />
performer during performance) (p.44)<br />
พิณเพียะ (a type of phin) (glossary) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
origin of<br />
name(instrument), how<br />
it is played, picture<br />
history, occasion it is<br />
played, how it is<br />
played, region where it<br />
is played, picture<br />
129
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
Modifiers<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
เครื่องสี<br />
ซอ TMT so (generic term for bowed stringed<br />
instruments) (p.44)<br />
ซอดวง TMT so duang (p.100)<br />
ซอ (a generic term for bowed<br />
stringed instruments) (glossary) <br />
ซอดวง (a stringed instrument ---two<br />
–stringed bowed lute with cylindrical<br />
resonator) (glossary) <br />
ซอดวง TMMC sau duang – (higher-pitched 2-<br />
stringed fiddle) (p.78)<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
picture<br />
130
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ซอดวง (higher –pitched and<br />
melodically dominant of the<br />
two-stringed fiddles.Resonating body<br />
made of hardwood cylinder, with<br />
snake-skin face. In contrast to<br />
Western fiddle –type instrument, the<br />
strings are not depressed against a<br />
fingerboard to produce pitches. Bow<br />
“attached” to in strument by being<br />
strung through the in strument’s<br />
strings) (p.491) <br />
ซอดวง TCM saw duang (s) (a two-string solo<br />
fiddle) (p.26)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ region where<br />
it is played, picture<br />
131
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ซอดวง TMI saw- dua-ng (p.111)<br />
ซอสามสาย TMT so sam sai (bowed, three-stringed<br />
instrument) (p.44)<br />
<br />
ซอสามสาม (a stringed instrument --three<br />
–stringed bowed lute with<br />
triangular sound box) (glossary) <br />
ซอสามสาย TMMC sau saam saay (3 –stringed fiddle)<br />
(p.78)<br />
ซอสามสาย (three-stringed fiddle,<br />
used in mahoorii ensembles and in<br />
solo, and solo plus vocal, repetoire.<br />
the bow is no “atttached.” (p.491) <br />
ซอสามสาย TCM saw sam sai (a three-string fiddle)<br />
(p.27)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ compare with<br />
other instruments,<br />
picture<br />
type of name,<br />
information about<br />
players<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ region where<br />
it is played<br />
132
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ซอสามสาย TMI saw-sa-m sai (p.105)<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ TMMC sau saam saay lip (p.99) <br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ TCM saw sam sai lib (a smaller three-string<br />
fiddle with higher pitches) (p.27) <br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ TMI saw –li-p (small size saw) (p.109) <br />
ซออู<br />
TMT<br />
so u (the bowed stringed instrument<br />
with a sound box (resonating chamber<br />
or disphram) made from half an<br />
ordinary coconut shell) (p.97)<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitut<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
compare with other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
133
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ซออู (a string instrument ---two –<br />
stringed bowed lute with half coconut<br />
shell sound box) (glossary) <br />
ซออู<br />
TMMC sau uu (lower –pitched 2-stringed<br />
fiddle) (p.78)<br />
ซออู (lower pitched and melodically<br />
subordinate of the two-stringed<br />
fiddles. Resonating body made of<br />
coconut shell, with leather face;<br />
sound-holes carved into back. Bow is<br />
“attached” as on sau duang) (p.491) <br />
ซออู TCM saw oo (s) (a two-string<br />
accompanying fiddle) (p.27)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
body positions and<br />
postures of players,<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ region where<br />
it is played, picture<br />
134
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ซออู<br />
TMI saw –u- (p.109)<br />
เครื่องตี<br />
เครื่องตีดําเนินทํานอง<br />
ขิม TMT khim ขิม (a zither –type stringed<br />
instrument = the Chinese yang ch’in)<br />
(glossary) <br />
<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
ขิม TMMC khim ขิม (hammered zither or<br />
dulcimer –like instrument, derived<br />
within last century from China and<br />
hence not a standard part of any<br />
ensemble; one informant cited the<br />
year 1924 for its introduction to<br />
Thailand. Popular with amateur<br />
players and young students, the<br />
instrument can be performed solo or<br />
added to mahoorii and khruang saay<br />
ensembles) (p.467) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, compare with<br />
other instruments,<br />
picture<br />
135
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆอง TMT khong (gong or gong- kettles) (p.44)<br />
ฆอง (a gong or gong-kettles)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆอง TMI khaw-ng (gong) (p.25)<br />
<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ instrument<br />
used for playing,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments<br />
ฆองกระแต TMI khaw-ng gratae (p.28) occasion it is played<br />
ฆองกลาง TMT khong (wong) klang (“medium-sized”<br />
circle of gongs) (p.51)<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
ฆองกลาง TCM medium gong set (p.27) <br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
size/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used, sound,<br />
octave, picture<br />
136
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ฆองชัย TMI khaw-ng chai (p.27)<br />
ฆองมอญ TMT khong mon ฆองมอญ (gong –circle on<br />
a crescent- shaped rack) (glossary)<br />
ฆองมอญ TMMC khaung maun ฆองมอญ (Mon gongs;<br />
<br />
<br />
set of tuned, kettle-shaped gongs,<br />
suspended on upright, u-shaped rack.<br />
Appears in the piiphaat maun) (p.466) <br />
ฆองมอญ TMI khaw-ng maw-n (p.33)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension/<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
origin of<br />
name(instument)<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played, ensemble in<br />
which it is used, picture<br />
type of name<br />
appearance: shape/<br />
type, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
137
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก TMMC 116)<br />
ฆองมอญเล็ก (Mon gongs; set of<br />
tuned, kettle-shaped gongs, suspended<br />
on upright, u-shaped rack. Appears<br />
in the piiphaat maun, ,smaller,<br />
higher-pitched, melodically<br />
subordinate instrument) (p.466) <br />
ฆองราง TMT khong rang (eight kettles on a straight<br />
rack) (p.46)<br />
ฆองราง(row of gong –kettles on a<br />
rack) (glossary) <br />
ฆองราง TMI khaw-ng ra-ng (p.30)<br />
<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ฆองวง TMT khong wong (set or circle of gongkettles<br />
on a stand) (p.44) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ picture<br />
history, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
function, compare to<br />
other instruments,<br />
picture<br />
138
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองวง TMMC khaung wong ฆองวง (lit “gong<br />
circle”; circular rack of kettle –<br />
shaped, bossed gongs which lies<br />
horizontally on the floor; performer<br />
sits inside the “circle.”. Played with<br />
two mallets. Fills important<br />
leadership role in piiphaat ensemble.)<br />
(p.466) <br />
ฆองวงเล็ก TMT<br />
khong wong lek (small circle of<br />
gongs, a small set of gong-kettles)<br />
(p.50,51)<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก (small gong –circle)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆองวงเล็ก TMMC khaung wong lek (small gong-circle)<br />
(p.78)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitut<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, octave, pitch,<br />
picture<br />
139
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก (lit “gong circle”; circular<br />
rack of kettle –shaped, bossed gongs<br />
which lies horizontally on the floor;<br />
performer sits inside the “circle.”.<br />
Played with two mallets. Fills<br />
important leadership role in piiphaat<br />
ensemble,smaller, higher-pitched,<br />
melodically subordinate instrument)<br />
(p.466) <br />
ฆองวงเล็ก TM the gong wong lek (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Celesta.) (p.36)<br />
(Celesta) (p.48,49) <br />
ฆองวงเล็ก TCM small gong set (p.26, 27) <br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ scale, pitch<br />
140
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก TMI khaw-ng wong lek (small circle of<br />
gongs) (p.32)<br />
ฆองวงใหญ TMT khong wong yai (large circle of<br />
gongs) (p.45)<br />
ฆองวงใหญ (large gong- circle)<br />
(glossary)<br />
Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, instrument in<br />
which it is used<br />
history, appearcnce:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/<br />
implement used in<br />
playing, position in<br />
ensemble, octave,<br />
picture<br />
141
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองวงใหญ TMMC khaung wong yai (large gong- circle)<br />
(p.78)<br />
ฆองวงใหญ (lit “gong circle”;<br />
circular rack of kettle –shaped,<br />
bossed gongs which lies horizontally<br />
on the floor; performer sits inside the<br />
“circle.”. Played with two mallets.<br />
Fills important leadership role in<br />
piiphaat ensemble, larger,<br />
lower-pitched, melodically dominant<br />
instrument.)(p.466)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
type of name, type of<br />
players,<br />
position in ensemble,<br />
function, picture<br />
142
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองวงใหญ TM the gong wong yai (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Resonophone or<br />
Tubaphone or Glockenspiel.) (p.36)<br />
(Resonophone or Clockenspiel) (p.50)<br />
ฆองวงใหญ TCM big gong set (p. 26) <br />
ฆองวงใหญ TMI khaw-ng wong yai (large circle of<br />
gong) (p.32)<br />
ระนาด TMT ranat (xylophone – set of wooden<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
<br />
keys on a stand) (p.44) <br />
ระนาด TCM ranad (a wooden xylophone) (p. 26) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
scale, appearance:<br />
shape, material,<br />
dimension/ pitch, about<br />
performer, how it is<br />
played, ensemble in<br />
which it is used, picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension/<br />
instrument in which it<br />
is used, picture<br />
histoy, picture<br />
information of material<br />
143
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
ระนาดทอง TMT ranat thong (p.62)<br />
ระนาดทอง (a metallophone ;<br />
original name of the ranat ek lek)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ระนาดทอง TMI<br />
rana-t thaw-ng or rana-t ay-k lek<br />
(p.20) <br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
TMT ranat thum (p.57) history, appearance:<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
(low –pitched xylophone) (<br />
dimension/ pitch,<br />
glossary) <br />
picture<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
TMMC ranaat thum (ranaat is xylophone;<br />
thum translated to be low or deep in<br />
tone) (p.78)<br />
(xylophone) (p.116)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
(lower –pitched and<br />
melodically subordinate of the<br />
wooden –keyed xylophones; actually,<br />
the keys may be made of bamboo.<br />
Wooden body is narrow and<br />
rectangular, box-like compared to the<br />
ranaat eek.) (p.488) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
type of name, position<br />
in ensemble, picture<br />
144
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
TM<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
ranad thume or thume mai<br />
(Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Alto<br />
Xylophone with wooden-resonance<br />
bars or Marimba) (p.36)<br />
(Xylophone alto or Marimba)<br />
(p.48,49) <br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
TCM ranad toom (p.26) picture<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
TMI rana-t thum (p.19)<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Hyphenated<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ picture<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
TMT ranat thum lek (p.63) history, appearance:<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
(low-pitched<br />
metallophone ) (glossary) <br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
shape/ pitch, picture<br />
145
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies Explanation of<br />
Modifiers<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
TMMC ranaat thum lek , (lek is iron; these<br />
iron-keyed xylophones are musical<br />
partners to the wooden ones above,<br />
and used only in the larger-sized<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.78)<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
(metal keyed version,<br />
used in the larger piiphaat<br />
ensembles.) (p.488) <br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
TM ranad thong thume or thume lek<br />
(Approximate equivalents among the<br />
Western instrument; Alto Xylophone<br />
with steel-resonance bars) (p.36)<br />
(Resonophone alto) (p.48,49) <br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
TCM ranad toom lek (with metal keys)<br />
Transliteration<br />
(p.26) <br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
picture<br />
146
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
TMI rana-t thum lek (p.21)<br />
ระนาดเอก TMT ranat ek (a xylophone with a boatshaped<br />
resonating box supported on a<br />
small pedistal) (p.54)<br />
<br />
ระนาดเอก (high –pitched xylophone)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ระนาดเอก TMMC ranaat eek (ranaat is xylophone; eek<br />
means first, or one) (p.78),<br />
(xylophone) (p.116)<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ระนาดเอก (higher pitched and<br />
melodically dominant wooden –keyed<br />
xylophone, played with pair of<br />
mallets. Wooden body is<br />
boat-shaped) (p.488). <br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ instrument<br />
used for playing, picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, material/ sound,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, pitch, picture<br />
type of name, position<br />
in ensemble, function,<br />
picture<br />
147
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ระนาดเอก TM the ranad ek (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Treble Xylophone with<br />
wooden-resonamce bars (p.36)<br />
(Xylophone, treble) (p.48,50) <br />
ระนาดเอก TCM ranad ek (p.26) <br />
ระนาดเอก TMI rana-t ay-k (p.15)<br />
ระนาดเอกทอง TM<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ranad thong ek or thume lek<br />
(Approximate equivalents among<br />
the Western instrument; Treble<br />
Xylophone with steel- resonance<br />
bars) (p.36) <br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
scale, appearance:<br />
material, dimension/<br />
number, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
implements used for<br />
playing, picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ function,<br />
picture<br />
scale, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used, picture<br />
148
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก TMT ranat ek lek or ranat thong (iron ranat<br />
ek) (p.62)<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก (high-pitched<br />
metallophone) (glossary) <br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก TMMC ranaat eek lek (lek is iron; these ironkeyed<br />
xylophones are musical<br />
partners to the wooden ones above,<br />
and used only in the larger-sized<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.78)<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก TCM<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก (metal-keyed<br />
version, included in the larger<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.488) <br />
ranad ek lek (with metal keys) (p.26) <br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก TMI rana-t thaw-ng or rana-t ay-k lek<br />
(p.20)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, material/<br />
picture<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ picture<br />
149
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
วงฆองชัย TMMC<br />
เครื่องตีกํากับจังหวะ<br />
กรับ TMT<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
wong khaung chay (a set of seven<br />
vertically- suspended gongs, the gong<br />
pitches outline the main melodic<br />
pitches of songs) (p.110)<br />
วงฆองชัย (circular rack of vertically<br />
suspended gongs, of different sizes<br />
and pitches, used in the piiphaat<br />
dukdamban enesmble) (p.497) <br />
วงฆองชัย TMI wong khaw-ng chai (circle of khawng<br />
chai gongs)(p.35)<br />
<br />
krap (rhythm sticks made from pieces<br />
of bamboo, cut and polished (p.44)<br />
กรับ a wooden percussion<br />
instrument; a pair is held in each hand<br />
(glossary) <br />
กรับ TMI grap (p.13) <br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used<br />
150
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กรับคู<br />
TMI grap khu (pair of grap) (p.13)<br />
กรับพวง TMT<br />
krap phuang (consists of several long<br />
thin sheets of metal alternated with<br />
thin pieces of wood) (p.102)<br />
<br />
กรับพวง (a percussion instrument of<br />
loose pieces tied together; held in the<br />
right hand and slapped against the<br />
palm of the left) (glossary) <br />
กรับพวง TMI grap phuang (cluster or bunch of<br />
grap) (p.14)<br />
กรับเสภา TMT<br />
krap sepha (two nearly square bars of<br />
hardwood about one and a half inches<br />
wide on each side by eight inches<br />
long) (p.54)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ how it is<br />
played, picture (shown<br />
in a picture<br />
ensemble)<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
how it is played,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
151
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กรับเสภา TMMC<br />
กรับเสภา TMI grap say-pha- (p.14)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
กรับเสภา (a wooden percussion<br />
instrument) (glossary) <br />
krap seephaa กรับเสภา (pair of<br />
wooden bars, held in each hand of a<br />
performer. Clacked together to<br />
produce rhythmic accompaniment for<br />
recited epic genre, seephaa) (p.472) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
กลอง TMT klong (drum) (p.44)<br />
กลอง (generic word for “drum”)<br />
(glossary) <br />
กลอง TMI glaw-ng (drum) (p.35) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
how it is played, picture<br />
152
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองแขก TMT klong khaek (“foreign” or Indian<br />
drum) (p.45)<br />
กลองแขก (“foreign drum”) (glossary) <br />
กลองแขก TMMC klaung kheek (pair of double-headed<br />
drums, held on laps of two separate<br />
players) (p.79)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
กลองแขก (cylindrical, two-headed<br />
drums held horizontally across<br />
performer’s laps. Leather heads are<br />
laced on. Played in pairs by two<br />
performers. Commonly substituted<br />
for taphoon in piiphaat ensembles and<br />
thoon/rammanaa in mahoorii and<br />
khrung saay ensembles) (p.471) <br />
กลองแขก TCM glong tahd picture<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
tempo, picture<br />
gender of instruments,<br />
picture<br />
153
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองแขก TMI glaw-ng khae-k (p.48)<br />
กลองชนะ TMMC<br />
กลองชนะ TMI glaw-ng chana (p.51)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
klaung chana กลองชนะ (drum<br />
similar to the klaung kheek but<br />
appearing in the rare pageant<br />
ensemble, tree sang klaung chana.<br />
Decorated in festive colors) (p.471) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
how it is played, origin<br />
of name(instument),<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, ensemble<br />
in which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played<br />
154
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองชวา TMT klong chawa (Javanese drum) (in<br />
context:73)<br />
กลองชวา (“Javanese drum” – that is,<br />
a Javanese-derived drum) (glossary) <br />
กลองชวา TMI glaw-ng cha wa- (Javanese drums)<br />
(p.48) <br />
กลองชาตรี TMT<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
klong chatri (drum used in the<br />
southern theater (p.44), (a drum with<br />
pegged heads, like the klong that but<br />
much smaller –the body being about<br />
ten inches high, the heads about eight<br />
inches in diameter) (p.104)<br />
กลองชาตรี (a drum of southern<br />
Thailand) (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
155
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองชาตรี TMMC klaung chaatrii (p.112) type of name,<br />
picture<br />
กลองชาตรี (goblet-shaped drum<br />
unique to the piiphaat chaatrii, oned<br />
used for the dramatic genre lakhaun<br />
chaatrii. That ensemble can also be<br />
called chaatrii. the “light” version of<br />
the small-sized piphaat ensemble,<br />
today accompanying southern-style (<br />
“chaatrii” or “nooraa”) epic drama<br />
(p.470) <br />
กลองชาตรี TMI glaw-ng cha-tri (p. 38)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, occasion it is<br />
played, region where it<br />
is played, picture<br />
156
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies Explanation of<br />
Modifiers<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
กลองตะโพน TMI glaw-ng ta pho-n (two ta pho-n<br />
drums) (p.41)<br />
กลองตุก<br />
TMI glaw-ng tuk (p.38) <br />
<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used, type,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
how it is played, picture<br />
กลองทัด TMT klong that (p.72) history, appearance:<br />
กลองทัด (large barrel –shaped<br />
peg-headed drum) (glossary) <br />
กลองทัด TMMC klaung that (pair of upright drums, hit<br />
with sticks) (p.79)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
กลองทัด (pair of drums played by<br />
single performer; hit with sticks.<br />
Heads tacked on. Appear in the<br />
piiphaat ensemble) (p.471) <br />
dimension, material/<br />
how it is played, picture<br />
picture<br />
157
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองทัด TM the klong thad (a thick large drum)<br />
(p.14) (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument;<br />
Timpani) (p.36) <br />
กลองทัด TCM glong tahd (twin drums) (p.26) <br />
กลองทัด TMI glaw-ng that (p.35)<br />
กลองมะริกัน TMT klong marigan (American bass drum)<br />
(p.45)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
กลองมริกัน (American bass drum)<br />
(glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
158
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองมะริกัน TMI glaw-ng mari gan (glaw-ng amay-ri<br />
gan or American drum) (p.63)<br />
กลองมลายู TMT klong malayu (Malayan drum) (p.45)<br />
กลองมลายู TMMC<br />
<br />
กลองมลายู (Malayan drum) (glossary) <br />
klaung malaayuu (a drum similar in<br />
appearance to the klaung kheek, and<br />
similarly played in pairs, Malay drum)<br />
Transliteration<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
กลองมลายู (drums, played in pairs,<br />
similar in appearance to klaung<br />
kheek. Appear in the rare ensembles,<br />
wong bua lauy and wong piiphaat<br />
naang hong, both of which are used in<br />
cremation ceremonies) (p.471) <br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
type of name<br />
159
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies Explanation of<br />
Modifiers<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
กลองมลายู TMI glaw-ng mala-yu- (p.49)<br />
กลองยาว TMT klong yao (long drum)<br />
(p.44)<br />
กลองยาว TMI glaw-ng yao- (p.58)<br />
กลองสองหนา TMT<br />
<br />
กลองยาว (long drum) (glossary) <br />
song na (literally, “two faces,” that is,<br />
a two-headed drum) (p.71)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
สองหนา (a medium-sized,<br />
hand-played drum) (glossary) <br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ how it is<br />
played, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
position in ensemble,<br />
picture<br />
160
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
กลองสองหนา TMMC<br />
saung naa (lit “two -faced drums,”<br />
which replaces the taphoon in certain<br />
types of piiphaat ensemble repertoire)<br />
(p.79)<br />
สองหนา (lit” two faces”, referring to<br />
this drum’s two heads. Cylindrical<br />
shaped (in contrast to the barrel shape<br />
of the taphoon); often substituted for<br />
taphoon in the piiphaat ensemble<br />
serving as vocal accompaniment)<br />
(p.491) <br />
กลองสองหนา TM the song na (a small long drum used<br />
in conjunction with other instruments,<br />
and also called Poeng Mang<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
(เปงมาง) when it is differently used<br />
for accompanying songs) (p.14) <br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
type of name, picture<br />
161
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
กลองสองหนา TMI saw-ng na (two drumheads) (p.55)<br />
<br />
เกราะ TMT kro (small “slit drum” made from a<br />
piece of bamboo with nodes at each<br />
end (p.44)<br />
เกราะ an old bamboo percussion<br />
instrument (glossary) <br />
เกราะ TMI graw (p.9)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
โกรง TMT krong (large bamboo “slit drum,”<br />
several nodes in length (p.44)<br />
โกรง an old bamboo percussion<br />
instrument (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
function, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
material/ how it is<br />
played, occasion it is<br />
played, picture<br />
162
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
โกรง TMI gro-ng (p.11)<br />
ฆองคู<br />
TMT<br />
<br />
<br />
khong khu (kettles similar to those<br />
used on the khong wong, fastened<br />
horizontally in a small rectangular<br />
box frame) (p.104)<br />
ฆองคู (a pair of gong- kettles)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆองคู<br />
TMMC khaung khuu (a pair of small gongs<br />
set in a box) (p.112)<br />
ฆองคู<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
(two kettle- shaped gongs<br />
inside a rectangular frame. Appears in<br />
the “light” version of the smallest<br />
size of piiphaat ensembles) (p.466) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
occasion of plyaing,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
picture<br />
163
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองคู<br />
TMI khaw-ng khu- (a pair of gongs) (p.28)<br />
ฆองระเบ็ง TMT khong rabeng (gong used for the<br />
rabeng, an ancient Type of vocal<br />
entertainment music) (p.44)<br />
<br />
ฆองระเบง (an old style gong)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆองระเบ็ง TMI khaw-ng rabay-ng (p.29) <br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
ฆองราว TMT khong rao or khong hui (set of gongs<br />
on a rack) (p.67)<br />
ฆองราว (set of gongs on a stand)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆองราว TMMC khaung raaw (khaung huy) (p.124) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ occasion it is<br />
played, reginal of<br />
playing, picture<br />
164
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองราว TMI khaw-ng rao (p.29)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
TMT khong rao or khong hui (set of three<br />
gongs on a rack) (p.67)<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
(a gong on a tripod stand)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฆองหุย<br />
TMMC huy or khaung huy หุย,<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
(set of<br />
3, 5 or 7 vertically –suspended<br />
gongs, used in piiphaat during certain<br />
epic episodes) (p.465) <br />
ฆองหุย<br />
TM the gong hooi (consisting of a set of<br />
3,5, or 7 gongs of different sizes, and<br />
therefore of different pitches) (p.14) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance, how<br />
played, occasion<br />
played, other names,<br />
picture<br />
165
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
TMI khaw-ng mui or khaw-ng hui (p.27) <br />
ฆองเหมง TMT<br />
ฆองเหมง TMMC<br />
khong meng (a small gong held up<br />
manually by a curved wooden handle<br />
from which it is suspended and struck<br />
with a piece of wood or a padded<br />
beater) (p.103)<br />
ฆองเหมง (a small, suspended, hand-<br />
held gong) (glossary) <br />
khaung meeng ฆองเมง (small gong,<br />
suspended manually and hit with a<br />
mallet or stick. Appeared in historical<br />
ensembles) (p.466) <br />
ฆองเหมง TMI khaw-ng may-ng (p.27)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
instrument used for<br />
playing, picture<br />
166
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฆองโหมง TMI khaw-ng mo-ng (p.26)<br />
<br />
ฉาบ TMT chap (medium-sized metal hand<br />
cymbals) (p.44) <br />
ฉาบ TMMC chaap ฉาบ (pair of metal hand –<br />
cymbals, larger than the ching and<br />
somewhat flatter. Used to emphasize<br />
important metric pulses in larger<br />
piiphaat ensembles) (p.462) <br />
ฉาบ TMI cha-p (a pair of small metal cymbals)<br />
(p.24)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension/<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
type, function, compare<br />
to other instruments<br />
167
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฉาบเล็ก TMT chap lek (a pair of medium-sized<br />
cymbals of flat metal with a central<br />
rounded boss about three-quarters of<br />
an inch deep) (p.66)<br />
ฉับเล็ก (medium –size cymbals)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ฉาบเล็ก TMMC chaap lek (hand cymbals) (p.117)<br />
ฉาบเล็ก (pair of metal hand-cymbals,<br />
larger than the ching and somewhat<br />
flatter. Used to emphasize important<br />
metric pulses in larger piiphaat<br />
ensembles, smaller sized, used more<br />
frequently) (p.462) <br />
ฉาบเล็ก TM the charb lek (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Small cymbals) (p.36)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
(Medium cymbals) (p.50) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used, how it<br />
is played, picture<br />
168
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฉาบเล็ก TCM cymbals picture<br />
ฉาบเล็ก TMI cha-p lek (p.24)<br />
<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
function, picture<br />
ฉาบใหญ TMT chap yai (p.67) appearance: shape<br />
ฉับใหญ (large –size cymbals)<br />
(glossary)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
ฉาบใหญ TMMC chaap yay ฉาบใหญ (pair of metal<br />
hand-cymbals, larger than the ching<br />
and somewhat flatter. Used to<br />
emphasize important metric pulses in<br />
larger piiphaat ensembles, larger size)<br />
(p.462) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
dimension/ size,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
169
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฉาบใหญ TM<br />
the charb yai, (Approximate<br />
equivalents among the Western<br />
instrument; Large cymbals) (p.36)<br />
(Large cymbals) (p.50) <br />
ฉาบใหญ TCM cymbals picture<br />
ฉาบใหญ TMI cha-p yai (p.24)<br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
TMT ching (small metal hand cymbals)<br />
(p.44)<br />
(a pair of cymbals made of thick<br />
metal and shaped like teacups or<br />
small hollow cones) (p.64),<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
(small hand cymbals) (p.65)<br />
ฉิ ่ง (small hand cymbals) (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
function, picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
how it is played,<br />
tempo, picture<br />
170
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
TMMC ching (small metal hand –cymbals)<br />
(p.79)<br />
type of name, position<br />
in ensemble,<br />
(cymbals) (p.117)<br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
(small metal hand-cymbals,<br />
ubiquitous in Thai classical music.<br />
Mark important metric pluses which<br />
function, picture<br />
indicate chan.) (p.464) <br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
TM the ching (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument;<br />
Triangle) (p.36) (Small cymbals)<br />
(p.48,50) <br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
TCM ching (small cymbals) (p.27) <br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
TMI ching (a pair of cymbals) (p.23)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ function,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
171
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ตะโพน TMT<br />
taphon (the main drum used in the pi<br />
phat (percussion) ensemble) (p.68)<br />
ตะโพน (a barrel-shaped drum on a<br />
stand) (glossary)<br />
ตะโพน TMMC taphoon (double headed drum. “the<br />
most important rhythm instrument.”<br />
(p.79)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
ตะโพน (two headed barrel shaped<br />
drum used in piiphaat ensemble. Ash<br />
and rice mixture applied to lower<br />
head for tuning. Heads tuned to an<br />
interval of approximately one fifth,<br />
but not tuned definitely in relation to<br />
ensemble. Of ritual significance, and<br />
not played by females) (p.493) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ sound,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, instruction of<br />
playing, picture<br />
gender of player, picture<br />
172
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
ตะโพน TM the tapone (a kind of hand timpano<br />
with drum-heads covering both ends)<br />
(p.14) (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; small<br />
hand tympano) (p.36) (small hand<br />
tympano) (p.48,50) <br />
ตะโพน TCM tapohn (two-sided drum) (p.26) <br />
ตะโพน TMI ta-pho-n (p.39)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
how it is played,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
173
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ตะโพนมอญ TMT taphon mon (p.69) appearance: shape,<br />
taphon mon ตะโพนมอญ (the mon<br />
model of the taphon) (glossary)<br />
<br />
ตะโพนมอญ TMMC taphoon maun (two-sided drum)<br />
(p.117) <br />
ตะโพนมอญ TMI ta pho-n maw-n (p.40)<br />
ทับ TMI tho-n or thap (p.42)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
dimenstion/ size,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played<br />
174
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
โทน TMT thon (goblet or vase drum; India,<br />
from “dhol”?) (p.45)<br />
โทน TMMC<br />
โทน (a goblet or inverted<br />
vase-shaped drum with a single head)<br />
(glossary) <br />
thoon (goblet-shaped drum, leather<br />
head laced on, usually played<br />
simultaneously by one person, and<br />
conceived of as one unit musically.<br />
Hence they are referred to in<br />
conjunction, thoon/rammanaa.) (p.79)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
โทน (goblet-shaped drum with<br />
ceramic body, leather head laced on.<br />
Paired with rammanaa and played by<br />
a single musician, for the rhythmic<br />
parts of the two form one pattern.<br />
Sometimes called thoon mahoorii to<br />
distinguish from below (below means<br />
thon chaatrii) (p.495) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape/ picture<br />
type of name, picture<br />
175
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
โทน TCM tohn(p.27) picture<br />
โทน TMI tho-n or thap (p.42)<br />
<br />
history, appearance:<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played<br />
โทนชาตรี TMT thon chatri (p.76) appearance: shape,<br />
โทนชาตรี TMMC thoon chaatrii (p.112)<br />
โทนชาตรี TMI tho-n cha-tri- (p.43)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
โทนชาตรี (a drum of south Thailand<br />
; small-size klong that) (glossary) <br />
โทนชาตรี (similar to above (above<br />
means thoon mahoorii) but played in<br />
pairs in southern Thailand to<br />
accompany shadow theater and<br />
lakhaun nooraa) (p.495) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played, picture<br />
appearance: dimension,<br />
material/ ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
how it is played, picture<br />
176
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
โทนมโหรี TMT thon mahori โทนมโหรี (the thon<br />
drum used in the mahori ensemble)<br />
(glossary) <br />
โทนมโหรี TMI tho-n maho-ri- (p.43)<br />
บัณเฑาะว TMT bando (small hourglass drum; India;<br />
Pali: “panawa” ) (p.45)<br />
<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
บัณเฑาะว (a small, hand drum)<br />
(glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, how it is played,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
appearance: shape<br />
177
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
บัณเฑาะว TMMC banthau (small two-faced ,hand-held<br />
drum) (p.116)<br />
บัณเฑาะว TMI ban daw (p.33)<br />
เปงมาง TMT poeng mang (p.113)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
banthau บัณเฑาะว (a percussion<br />
instrument. Two drumheads attached<br />
to a stick, sounded by balls attached<br />
to strings when rolled between the<br />
hands) (p.460) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
เปงมาง (a small, thong –wrapped<br />
barrel –shaped drum) (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
compare to other<br />
instruments, picture<br />
178
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
เปงมาง TMI per-ng ma-ng (p.52)<br />
<br />
เปงมางคอก TMT poeng mang khok (p.113)<br />
เปงมางคอก (a set of drum on their<br />
stand) (glossary) <br />
เปงมางคอก TMMC peeng maang khauk (circle of tuned<br />
drums) (p.117)<br />
เปงมางคอก (set of seven tuned drums<br />
(each a peeng maang) arranged<br />
vertically in a semicircular frame,<br />
used in the piiphaat maun ensemble)<br />
(p.480) <br />
เปงมางคอก TMI per-ng ma-ng khaw-k (a group of<br />
seven per-ng ma-ng drums) (p.54)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Description strategies Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played, picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
function, ensemble in<br />
which it is used, picture<br />
179
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
มโหระทึก TMI maho-ra therk (p.64)<br />
รํามะนา TMT<br />
รํามะนา TMMC<br />
rammana (a shallow frame drum with<br />
one head, about the size of a Western<br />
tambourine but without the<br />
“jangles.”) (p.77)<br />
<br />
รํามะนา (a small frame drum)<br />
(glossary) <br />
rammanaa (a frame drum, usually<br />
played simultaneously by one person,<br />
and conceived of as one unit<br />
musically. Hence they are referred to<br />
in conjunction,<br />
thoon/rammanaa) (p.79)<br />
Transliteration<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ occasion it is<br />
played, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
picture<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ reference to<br />
another book, picture<br />
picture<br />
180
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
รํามะนา (frame drum, with shallow<br />
wooden (sometimes ivory) body.<br />
Leather head is tacked on. Paired with<br />
thoon and played by a single<br />
musician, for the rhythmic parts of<br />
the two form one pattern) (p.487) <br />
รํามะนา TCM ramana (a small hand drum) (p.27) picture<br />
รํามะนา TMI ram mana- (p.46)<br />
appearance: shape/<br />
type, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
compare to other<br />
<br />
instruments, picture<br />
โหมง TMT mong (p.67) appearance: shape,<br />
โหมง (a large gong) (glossary)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
material, dimension,<br />
picture<br />
181
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
โหมง TMMC moong or khaung moong (suspended<br />
gong) (p.117)<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
(ฆอง) โหมง (metal gong suspended<br />
from tripod. Appears in some of the<br />
larger sized standard ensembles)<br />
(p.476) <br />
โหมง TM the mong (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; No<br />
equivalent except perhaps tom-tom or<br />
gong) (p.36) (Large Gong) (p.48,50) <br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
picture<br />
182
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
โหมง TCM mong picture<br />
โหมง TMI mong (p.26) <br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
เครื่องเปาไมมีลิ้น<br />
ขลุย<br />
TMT khlui (vertical bamboo flute with<br />
pegged mouthpiece) (p.77)<br />
ขลุย<br />
(the bamboo flute) (glossary) <br />
ขลุย<br />
TMMC khluy (vertical flute. Different sizes<br />
and ranges are indicated by noun<br />
modifiers) (p.79)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
ขลุย<br />
(vertically- held flute: appears in<br />
various named sizes, each of which<br />
is associated with a different mode or<br />
pitch level. Commonly used as a<br />
solo instrument, it also appears in<br />
khruang saay ensemble, and in the<br />
“soft” version of piiphaat ensembles.<br />
Used in the public schools for music<br />
education.) (p.468) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material<br />
type of name, picture<br />
183
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
ขลุย<br />
TMI khlui (flute types) (p.72)<br />
ขลุยกรวด<br />
TMI khlui grua-t (p.74) <br />
<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
type, compare with<br />
other instruments<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
TMT khlui phiang o (p.78) appearance: dimension/<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
(the medium –size<br />
bamboo flute) (glossary) <br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
TMMC khuly piang au (p.97) picture<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
TCM klui piang-or (a bamboo flute) (p.27) picture<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
TMI khlui phia-ng aw- (the middle-sized<br />
khlui) (p.74)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
size,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
184
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
Modifiers<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
TMT khlui lip (p.78) appearance: dimension/<br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
(the small –size bamboo<br />
flute) (glossary) <br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
TMMC khluy lip (another size of flute) (p.97) picture<br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
TCM<br />
klui lib (a smaller and higher pitched<br />
bamboo flute) (p.27) <br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
TMI khlui-li-p (the smallest-sized khlui)<br />
(p.74)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
size,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
picture<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
ขลุยอู<br />
TMT khlui u (p.78) appearance: dimension/<br />
ขลุยอู<br />
(the large –size bamboo flute)<br />
(glossary) <br />
ขลุยอู<br />
TMMC khluy uu (p.83) picture<br />
size,<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
185
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
ขลุยอู<br />
TMI khlui-u- (the largest-sized khlui)<br />
(p.74)<br />
แตร TMI trae- (p.89)<br />
<br />
<br />
แตรงอน TMMC tree ngaun (trumpets made from<br />
animal horns) (p.116, 496) <br />
แตรงอน TMI trae-ngaw-n (curved trumpet) (p.89)<br />
แตรฝรั่ง<br />
TMI<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
trae-farang (European trumpet) (p.91) <br />
แตรลางโพง TMI trae- la-ng pho-ng (p.91) <br />
Modifiers<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
type<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension/<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
picture<br />
history, occasion it is<br />
played, picture<br />
186
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
แตรลําโพง TMI trae-lam pho-ng (p.91) <br />
แตรวิลันดา TMI trae-wilanda- (p.91) <br />
เครื่องเปามีลิ้น<br />
ปTMT<br />
pi (p.78)<br />
ป<br />
history<br />
(double-reed instrument) (glossary) <br />
ป<br />
TMMC pii (oboe-like double -reed<br />
instruments of various sizes and<br />
ranges. Different types are in dicated<br />
by ensenbles) (p.79)<br />
ป (oboe-like reed instruments, used in<br />
piiphaat ensembles. Various sizes<br />
have different ranges of pitch, and<br />
occur in different musical contexts)<br />
(p.485) <br />
ป<br />
TMI pi (reed or oboe types) (p.75)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimensio/, ensemble in<br />
which it is used,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
type<br />
187
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ปกลาง<br />
TMT pi klang (about fifteen inches long,<br />
one and a half inches in diameter)<br />
(p.79)<br />
ปกลาง<br />
( medium – sized pi) (glossary) <br />
ปกลาง<br />
TMMC pii klaang ปกลาง (“medium” pii,<br />
according to Morton used to<br />
accompany shadow theater (1976:79)<br />
(p.485) <br />
ปกลาง<br />
TMI pi –gla-ng (p.77)<br />
ปไฉน<br />
TMT pi chanai (double –reed instrument,<br />
body with conical bore, about a foot<br />
long or less; India) (p.45)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ป ไฉน (early double-reed instrument)<br />
(glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
picture<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
picture<br />
history<br />
188
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ปไฉน<br />
TMMC pii chanay<br />
ป<br />
picture<br />
ปไฉน<br />
TMI pi-cha nai (p.84)<br />
ไฉน (pii chanay (rarely used today,<br />
but formerly used in processions.<br />
Small and high-pitched) (p.485) <br />
<br />
history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/ compare with<br />
other instruments,<br />
occasion it is played,<br />
picture<br />
ปชวา<br />
TMT pi chawa (Javanese “oboe”) (p.89) history, appearance:<br />
shape, dimension,<br />
material/<br />
ปชวา<br />
(“Javanese pi”) (glossary)<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, occasion it is<br />
played, pitch, picture<br />
189
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ปชวา<br />
TMMC pii chaawaa ปชวา (“Javanese” pii ,<br />
appears in certain specail ensembles,<br />
including the piiphaat naang hong,<br />
and the wong khruang saay pii<br />
ปชวา<br />
TMI pi-chawa- (p.86)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Also used in certain dance-drama<br />
contexts, and along with klaung<br />
kheek, to accompany Thai boxing)<br />
(p.485) <br />
<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ปนอก<br />
TMT pi nok (outdoor pi) (p.79) picture<br />
ปนอก<br />
(outdoor pi) (glossary) <br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
type of name<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, occasion it is<br />
played, origin of<br />
name(instument),<br />
picture<br />
190
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ปนอก<br />
TMMC pii nauk ปนอก (the “outside” pii,<br />
associated with lakhaun nauk<br />
(“outside” dance-drama- performed<br />
outside of the royal palace.<br />
Shorter in length than the pii nay)<br />
(p.485) <br />
ปนอก<br />
TCM pi-nok (p.26) <br />
ปนอก<br />
TMI pi –naw-k (p.77)<br />
<br />
picture<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
picture<br />
ปใน<br />
TMT pi nai (indoor pi) (p.79) appearance: shape/ size<br />
ปใน<br />
(indoor pi) (glossary)<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
parts of instument,<br />
process of making the<br />
reed for pi nai, picture<br />
191
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
ปใน<br />
TMMC<br />
pii nay ปใน<br />
(the “inside” pii, because<br />
it was associated with the khoon<br />
(masked dance-drama) and lakhaun<br />
nay (“inside” dance-drama) once<br />
confined to the palaces. This is the<br />
instrument usually referred to simply<br />
as pii) (p.485) <br />
ปใน<br />
TM the pi nai (Approximate equivalents<br />
among the Western instrument; Oboe<br />
or Piano-accordion or C Clarinet)<br />
(p.36) (Oboe) (p.48)<br />
ปใน<br />
TCM pi-nai (p.26) <br />
ปใน<br />
TMI pi-nai (p.77)<br />
ปมอญ<br />
TMT pi mon ปมอญ<br />
(mon –style pi)<br />
(glossary)<br />
<br />
<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
<br />
Description strategies<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
tones, scale, Function,<br />
parts of instruments,<br />
how it is played, picture<br />
appearance: dimension/<br />
picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
picture<br />
192
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 4 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Number<br />
Material<br />
Sound<br />
Size<br />
Shape<br />
Type<br />
ปมอญ<br />
TMMC pii maun (oboe) (p.116) picture<br />
ปมอญ<br />
TMI pi-maw-n (p.88)<br />
ปมอญ<br />
(“Mon” pii, used only in the<br />
piiphaat maun. Conical shape) (p.485) <br />
ปหอ<br />
TMI pi-haw- (p.87) <br />
ปออ<br />
TMI pi-aw- (p.78)<br />
Translation+cultrual substitute<br />
Transliteration+cultural substitute<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
<br />
Cultrual substitute<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Citation<br />
About players<br />
Parts of instruments<br />
Reference to other instruments<br />
Age<br />
Region where played<br />
How played<br />
Function<br />
Other names<br />
Position in ensemble<br />
Origin of name(instument)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Ensemble in which used<br />
Implement used in playing<br />
Similar Western instrument<br />
Specific word<br />
Generic word<br />
Cultural substitute<br />
Partly transliteration<br />
Explanation of<br />
descriptions and<br />
pictures<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, occasion it is<br />
played, picture<br />
appearance: shape,<br />
dimension, material/<br />
ensemble in which it is<br />
used, picture<br />
193
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms of Thai Musical Ensembles<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations<br />
ปพาทยรามัญ<br />
TMI pi-pha-t ra-man (p.34) <br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
วงกลองแขก TMT klong khaek ensemble (p.102) names of instruments, picture<br />
<br />
วงกลองแขกปชวา<br />
TMI pi- chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ngkhae-k<br />
pi-chawa- (p.87) <br />
วงขับไม TMT khap mai ensemble (literally “to recite or<br />
sing with a beat” or more figuratively “to<br />
perform on musical instruments.”) (p.101)<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
ขับไม (an old ensemble) (glossary) <br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
194
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงขับไม TMMC khap may or wong khap may (a threestringed<br />
fiddle, vocalist, and small two-faced<br />
hand-held drum called banthau) (p.116)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
(วง) ขับไม (historical ensemble—today<br />
played occasionally by university students—<br />
consisting of solo vocalist, sau saam saay,<br />
and banthau) (p.465) <br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
TMT khruang sai เครื่องสาย<br />
(the ensemble<br />
composed of stringed instruments , flute, and<br />
rhythmic percussion) (glossary) <br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
TMMC wong khruang saay (an ensemble of stringed<br />
instruments(this is what its name refers to<br />
literally), drums and hand cymbals<br />
(Morton’s “rhythmic percussion”), and khluy<br />
or flute) (p.91)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
วงเครื ่องสาย (wong khruang saay- ensemble<br />
of stringed instruments.) (p.469) <br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments,<br />
occasion played<br />
names of instruments<br />
names of instruments<br />
195
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
TCM the string ensemble (p.26) names of instruments<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
TMI khrer-a-ng sai- (string) ensemble (p.43,47) <br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
TMT medium-sized or doubled khruang sai<br />
ensemble (p.108) , medium-sized or doubled<br />
ensemble (p.111) <br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
TMMC wong khruang saay khruang khuu (mediumsized<br />
(lit. paired) ensemble of string<br />
instruments) (p.102)<br />
added to conventional ensembles to indicate<br />
medium size or type of instrumentation)<br />
(p.469) <br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
TCM (“doubled” string ensemble: another<br />
instrument of each kind is added, making a<br />
pair) <br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
names of instruments<br />
picture<br />
196
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
TMT<br />
small khruang sai ensemble (p.108), small<br />
ensemble (p.111) <br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
TCM wong khre-a-ng sai wong lek ( small string<br />
ensemble; one instrument of each kind only<br />
is used compable to the pi-phat khre-a-ng ha) <br />
วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
TMMC khruang saay pii chaawaa, wong khruang<br />
saay pii chaawaa (a standard type of stringed<br />
ensemble with pii chaawaa added. Known<br />
for requiring very skillful, masterful pii<br />
player.) (p.469) <br />
วงเครื่องสายผสมไวโอลิน<br />
TMMC<br />
wong khruang saay prasom violin (p.121) <br />
วงเถิดเทิง,<br />
วงเทิงบองกลองยาว<br />
TCM ther-t ther-ng or ther-ng baw-ng glaw-ng yao-<br />
(p.60) <br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
picture<br />
names of instruments,<br />
occasion played<br />
197
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
วงบัวลอย TMT bua loi (an old ensemble) (glossary) <br />
วงบัวลอย TMMC bua lauy or wong bua lauy (floating lotus<br />
ensemble) (p.116)<br />
(วง) บัวลอย (ensemble rarely performed<br />
today, but intended for use in cremation<br />
ceremonies for royalty, and has its own<br />
specific repertoire. Consists of pii chaawaa<br />
and rhythmic accom accompaniment. Morton<br />
views this as the precursor to the wong<br />
piiphaat naang hong) (p.460) <br />
วงบัวลอย TMI bua law-i ensemble (p.50) <br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
วงปชวากลองแขก<br />
TMI pi- chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ngkhae-k<br />
pi-chawa- (p.87) <br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
occasion played<br />
198
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
TMT<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
pi phat (the ensemble using melodic and<br />
rhythmic percussion) (p.104) ปพาทย<br />
(an<br />
ensemble composed of melodic and rhythmic<br />
percussion instruments and the pi) (glossary) <br />
วงปพาทย<br />
TMMC piiphaat or wong piiphaat (an ensemble of<br />
percussion instruments and the pii or oboe)<br />
(p.91)<br />
วงปพาทย(melodic<br />
percussive ensemble,<br />
which does not include stringed instruments.<br />
Accompanies rituals and theatrical genres<br />
but can also perform entertainment music)<br />
(p.486) <br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
occasion played, types, names<br />
of instruments, history<br />
the meaning of word; wong,<br />
pii, phaat<br />
names of instruments, type<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
TM piphat band (p.3) types, names of instruments<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
TCM the pi-phat ensemble (p.26) names of instruments<br />
199
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
TMI pi-pha-t (percussion) ensemble (p.43) <br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
TMT ensemble , a pair of instruments, medium-<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
sized or doubled piphat ensemble)<br />
(p.105,107) <br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
<br />
<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
TMMC khruang khuu (lit. instruments/pair) (p.96)<br />
เครื่องคู<br />
(lit. “instruments; paired”; term<br />
names of instruments<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
TCM<br />
added to conventional ensembles to indicate<br />
medium size or type of instrumentation)<br />
(p.469) <br />
wong pi-phat khre-a-ng khu (medium sized<br />
precussion ensemble another instrument of<br />
each kind is added, making a pair; a "double<br />
ensemble.) <br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
picture<br />
200
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
TMT khruang ha (literally, “five instruments)<br />
(p.105) เครื่องหา<br />
(a small ensemble ---“of<br />
five instruments”) (glossary) <br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
TMMC khruang haa (small size, “khruang haa” (lit.<br />
instruments/five) (p.95) , (the five<br />
–instrument or small sized piiphaat<br />
ensemble) (p.112)<br />
เครื ่องหา (lit. “instruments/five”; term added<br />
to conventional ensembles to indicate small<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
size or type of instrumentation) (p.469) <br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
TCM wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng ha (small percussion<br />
ensemble consisting of five instruments and<br />
the Ching) <br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
TMT khruang yai (large ensemble, literally, “large<br />
group of instruments, large pi phat<br />
ensemble) (p.105, 107) <br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
type<br />
picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
201
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
TMMC khruang yay (large size. “khruang yay” (lit.<br />
“instrument/large))(p.96)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
เครื่องใหญ<br />
(lit. “instruments/large”; term<br />
added to conventional ensembles to indicate<br />
large size or type of instrumentation) (p.469) <br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
TCM wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng yai (large<br />
percussion ensemble; all the important<br />
percussion instruments are included) <br />
วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
TMMC wong piiphaat chaatrii (specialized<br />
ensemble) (p.486) <br />
วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
TMI pi- pha-t cha-tri- ensemble (p.43) <br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments<br />
picture<br />
occasion played<br />
202
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
TMMC wong piiphaat dukdamban (วง) ปพาทยดึก<br />
ดําบรรพ (ensemble which accompanies the<br />
dramatic genre, lakhaun dukdamban, one of<br />
several innovatiove forms developed largely<br />
by Prince Naris in the time of King<br />
Chulalongkorn, late 19th century. A<br />
distinctive feature of this ensemble is the<br />
wong khaung chay, seven tuned gongs<br />
vertically suspended in a frame. Which does<br />
not appear in any other Thai ensembles)<br />
(p.486) <br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
TCM wong pi-phat, duk-dam-bun picture<br />
วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
TMI pi-pha-t derk dam-ban (p.34) <br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
203
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
TMT pi phat nang hong ensemble (p.112) , pi phat<br />
nang hong ปพาทยนางหงส<br />
(the pi phat<br />
funeral ensemble) (glossary) <br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
TMMC wong piiphaat naang hong (วง) ป พาทย<br />
นางหงส (ensemble formerly used in<br />
cremation ceremonies, but rare today) (p.486) <br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
TMI pi-pha-t na-ng hong ensemble (p.50,87) <br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
TMT pi phat mon ensemble (p.113)<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
names of instruments,<br />
occasion played<br />
names of instruments,<br />
occasion played, picture<br />
204
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
TMMC wong piiphaat maun (p.116) names of instruments,<br />
(วง) ปพาทยมอญ (the Mon-derived<br />
ensemble (which shares certain similarities<br />
to Burmese ensembles) commonly played at<br />
cremation ceremonies.<br />
Features Mon-derived versions of the<br />
regular piiphaat instruments, plus the set of<br />
tuned drums, peeng maang khauk) (p.486) <br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
TMI pi-pha-t maw-n (incontent:34) <br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
occasion played<br />
วงปพาทยมอญเครื่องคู<br />
TMMC piiphaat maun khruang khuu (p.116) names of instruments<br />
วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
TMT pi phat mai nuam (the pi phat ensemble<br />
using padded sticks) (glossary) . <br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
205
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
TMMC may nuam (p.111)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
ไมนวม (lit. “stick/ soft”; indicates the<br />
“soft” version of piiphaat) (p.476) <br />
วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
TMI pi-pha-t mainuam ensemble (incontent:41) <br />
Description strategies<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
วงปพาทยอยางเบา<br />
TMT light pi phat (p.104) occasion played<br />
วงปพาทยอยางหนัก<br />
TMT heavy pi phat (p.104) occasion played<br />
วงมโหรี TMT mahori มโหรี (an ensemble composed of<br />
melodic and rhythmic percussion instruments<br />
and flute) (glossary) <br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
206
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
วงมโหรี TMMC mahoorii (wong) mahoorii (….actually a<br />
combination of khruang saay and piiphaat<br />
ensembles”; Jearadithaporn ibid:4: cf.<br />
Morton ibid:105 as well) (p.91)<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
วงมโหรี (a standard type of ensemble,<br />
including both stringed and melodic<br />
percussive instruments. Ideally characterized<br />
by instruments of smaller size than those<br />
commonly used in piiphaat ensembles)<br />
(p.476) <br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Modifiers<br />
Description strategies<br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
วงมโหรี TCM the mahori ensemble (p.26) names of instruments<br />
207
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
วงมโหรี TMI maho-ri- (mixed string and<br />
percussion)ensemble (p.43,47) <br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องคู<br />
TMT medium sized or doubled mahori ensemble<br />
(p.109) , medium sized or doubled ensemble<br />
(p.111) <br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
TMT small mahori ensemble (p.109), small<br />
ensemble (p.111) <br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
TCM wong mahori khre-a-ng lek (small ensemble<br />
consisting of both string and percussion type<br />
instruments) <br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องสี่<br />
TMT original mahori (p.102)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องสี่<br />
TCM wong mahori boran or ancient mahori picture<br />
<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
picture<br />
history, names of instruments,<br />
picture<br />
208
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 5 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies Description strategies<br />
Modifiers<br />
Partial transliteration+age<br />
Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
Transliteration+translation+size<br />
Transliteration+translation<br />
Translation<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Size<br />
Type<br />
Citation<br />
Comparison to other ensembles<br />
Age<br />
Other names<br />
Origin of name(ensemble)<br />
Occasion played<br />
Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
Partial transliteration<br />
Transliteration<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation<br />
Hyphenated<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องหก<br />
TCM wong mahori khre-a-ag hok picture<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องใหญ<br />
TMT large mahori ensemble (p.110), large<br />
ensemble (p.111) <br />
Transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
Explanation<br />
of description and picture<br />
names of instruments, picture<br />
209
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 6 Strategies that Each Writer Used in Presenting English Terms of Types of Thai Music Instruments<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Description strategies Explanation<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
TMT stringed instruments (p.91)<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
TMMC strings (p.80) <br />
Transliteration<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
TMI stringed instruments (p.93) <br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
TMT plucked (p.91)<br />
Translation<br />
<br />
Partial translation<br />
<br />
Translation+material<br />
Translation+type<br />
Partial translation+material<br />
Translation of descriptions and pictures<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
TMMC khruang diit (plucked instruments) (p.78) names of instruments, type<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
TMI plucked stringed instruments (p.93) <br />
appearance, names and<br />
explanation of instruments<br />
210
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 6 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Description strategies Explanation<br />
เครื่องสี<br />
TMT bowed (p.94)<br />
Transliteration<br />
Translation<br />
<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation+material<br />
Translation+type<br />
Partial translation+material<br />
Translation of descriptions and pictures<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
เครื่องสี<br />
TMMC khruang sii (bowed instruments) (p.78) names of instruments, type<br />
เครื่องสี<br />
TMI bowed stringed instruments (p.104) <br />
type, names and explanation<br />
of instruments<br />
เครื่องตี<br />
TMMC khruang tii (hit or beaten instruments) (p.78) names of instruments, type<br />
เครื่องตี<br />
TM percussion section (13) types, names of instruments<br />
เครื่องตี<br />
TMI percussion instruments (p.8) type<br />
เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
TM melodic instruments (p.13) names of instruments<br />
เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
TCM melodic instruments (p.26) names of instruments<br />
เครื่องตีดําเนินทํานอง<br />
TMT melodic percussion (p.45)<br />
<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
211
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 6 (Continued)<br />
Thai terms Sources Representations Word translation strategies<br />
Description strategies Explanation<br />
เครื่องกํากับจังหวะ<br />
TM rhythmic instruments (p.13)<br />
Transliteration<br />
<br />
Translation<br />
Partial translation<br />
Translation+material<br />
Translation+type<br />
Partial translation+material<br />
Translation of descriptions and pictures<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
เครื่องกํากับจังหวะ<br />
TCM rhythmic instruments (p.26) names of instruments<br />
เครื่องตีกํากับจังหวะ<br />
TMT rhythmic percussion (p.64)<br />
เครื่องหนัง<br />
TMI percussion instruments using skin or leather<br />
(p.35) <br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
TMT woodwinds (p.78)<br />
<br />
<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
names and explanation of<br />
instruments<br />
เครื ่องเปา TMMC khruang paw (blown instruments) (p.79) names of instruments, type<br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
TM wood-wind section (p.13) names of instruments<br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
TMI wind instruments (p.71)<br />
<br />
type, names and explanation<br />
of instruments<br />
212
<strong>Appendix</strong> C<br />
The Lists of Strategies Used in Presenting Thai Music Terms
The lists of strategies used in presenting Thai musical instruments<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
กระจับป<br />
krajappi/ จะเข chakae/ พิณ phin/ พิณน้ําเตา<br />
phin nam tao/ ซอ so/ ซอ<br />
ดวง so duang/ ซอสามสาย so sam sai/ ซออู<br />
so u/ ขิม khim /ฆอง khong/ ฆองกลาง khong (wong)<br />
klang/ ฆองมอญ khong mon/ ฆองราง khong rang/ ฆองวง khong wong/ ฆองวงเล็ก khong wong<br />
lek/ ฆองวงใหญ khong wong yai/ ระนาด ranat/ ระนาดทอง ranat thong/ ระนาดทุม<br />
ranat thum/<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
ranat thum lek/ ระนาดเอก ranat ek/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก ranat ek lek/ กรับ krap/ กรับ<br />
พวง krap phuang/ กรับเสภา krap sepha/ กลอง klong/ กลองแขก klong khaek/ กลองชวา klong<br />
chawa/ กลองชาตรี klong chatri/ กลองทัด klong that/ กลองมะริกัน Klong marigan/ กลองมลายู<br />
klong malayu/ กลองยาว klong yao/ เกราะ kro/ โกรง krong/ ฆองคู<br />
khong khu/ ฆองระเบ็ง khong<br />
rabeng/ ฆองราว khong rao/ ฆองหุย<br />
khong hui/ ฆองเหมง khong meng/ ฉาบ chap/ ฉาบเล็ก chap<br />
lek/ ฉาบใหญ chap yai/ ฉิ่ง<br />
ching/ ตะโพน taphon/ ตะโพนมอญ taphon mon/ โทน thon/ โทน<br />
ชาตรี thon chatri/ โทนมโหรี thon mahori/ บัณเฑาะว bando/ เปงมาง poeng mang/ เปงมางคอก<br />
poeng mang khok/ รํามะนา rammana/ โหมง mong/ ขลุย<br />
khlui/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
khui phiang o/ ขลุย<br />
หลีบ khlui lip/ ขลุยอู<br />
khlui u/ ป<br />
pi/ ปกลาง<br />
pi klang/ ปไฉน<br />
pi chanai/ ปชวา<br />
pi chawa/ ปนอก<br />
pi<br />
nok/ ปใน<br />
pi nai/ ปมอญ<br />
pi mon/<br />
TMMC<br />
กระจับป<br />
kracappii/ จะเข chakhee/ พิณ phin/ ซอดวง sau duang/ ซอสามสาย sau<br />
sam saay/ ซอสามสายหลีบ sau saam saaylip/ ซออู<br />
sau uu/ ขิม khim/ ฆองมอญ khaung maun/<br />
ฆองวง khaung wong/ ฆองวงเล็ก khaung wong lek/ ฆองวงใหญ khuang wong yai/ ระนาดทุม<br />
ranaat thum/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
ranaat thum lek/ ระนาดเอก ranaat eek/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก ranaat eek<br />
214
lek/ วงฆองชัย wong khaung chay/ กรับเสภา krap seephaa/ กลองแขก kluaung kheek/ กลองชนะ<br />
klaung chana/ กลองชาตรี klaung chaatrii/ กลองทัด klaung that/ กลองมลายู klaung malaayuu/<br />
ฆองคู<br />
kaung khuu/ ฆองราว khaung raaw/ ฆองหุย<br />
khaung huy/ ฆองเหมง khaung meeng/ ฉาบ<br />
chap/ ฉาบเล็ก chap lek/ ฉาบใหญ chap yay/ ฉิ่ง<br />
ching/ ตะโพน taphoon/ ตะโพนมอญ taphoon<br />
maun/ โทน thoon/ โทนชาตรี thoon chatrii/ บัณเฑาะว banthau/ เปงมางคอก peeng maang khauk/<br />
รํามะนา rammanaa/ โหมง moong/ ขลุย<br />
khluy/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
khluy piang au/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
khluy lip/<br />
ขลุยอู<br />
khluy uu/ แตรงอน tree ngaun/ ป<br />
pii/ ปกลาง<br />
pii klaang/ ปไฉน<br />
pii chanay/ ปชวา<br />
pii<br />
chaawaa/ ปนอก<br />
pii nauk/ ปใน<br />
pii nay/ ปมอญ<br />
pii maun/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
ranad thume/ ระนาดเอก ranad ek/ ระนาดเอกทอง ranad thong ek/ กลองทัด<br />
the klong thad/ ฉาบเล็ก the charb lek/ ฉาบใหญ the charb yai/ ฉิ่ง<br />
the ching/ ตะโพน the tapone/<br />
โหมง the mong/ ปใน<br />
the pi nai/<br />
TCM<br />
215<br />
จะเข jakay (s)/ ซอดวง saw duang (s)/ ซอสามสาย saw sam sai/ ซอสามสายหลีบ saw sam<br />
sai lib/ ซออู<br />
saw oo (s)/ ระนาด ranad /ระนาดทุม<br />
ranad toom/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
ranad toom lek/<br />
ระนาดเอก ranad ek/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก ranad ek lek/ กลองทัด glong tahd/ ฉิ่ง<br />
ching/ ตะโพน<br />
tapohn/ โทน tohn/ รํามะนา ramana/ โหมง mong/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
klui piang-or/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
klui lip/ ป<br />
นอก pi-nok/ ปใน<br />
pi-nai/<br />
TMI<br />
กระจับป<br />
gra jap pi/ จะเข jakhay- / พิณ phi-n / พิณน้ําเตา<br />
phi- n nam tao/ พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
phi-n<br />
phia/ ซอดวง saw- dau-ng / ซอสามสาย saw- sa-m sai / ซออู<br />
saw- u-/ ฆอง khaw-ng/ ฆองกระแต<br />
khaw-ng gratae/ ฆองชัย khaw-ng chai/ ฆองมอญ khaw-ng maw-n / ฆองราง khaw-ng ra-ng/ ฆอง<br />
วงเล็ก khaw-ng wong lek / ฆองวงใหญ khaw-ng wong yai / ระนาดทอง rana-t thaw-ng/ ระนาด<br />
ทุม<br />
rana-t thum/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
rana-t thum lek/ ระนาดเอก rana-t ay-k/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก
216<br />
rana-t ay-k lek/ วงฆองชัย wong khaw-ng chai/ กรับ grap/ กรับคู<br />
grap khu/ กรับพวง grap phuang/<br />
กรับเสภา grap say-pha- / กลอง glaw-ng/ กลองแขก glaw-ng khae-k/ กลองชนะ glaw-ng chana/<br />
กลองชวา glaw-ng cha wa- / กลองชาตรี glaw-ng cha-tri/ กลองทัด glaw-ng that/ กลองตะโพน<br />
glaw-ng ta pho-n/ กลองตุก<br />
glaw-ng tuk/ กลองมะริกัน glaw-ng mari gan/ กลองมลายู glaw-ng<br />
mala-yu-/ กลองยาว glaw-ng yao-/ เกราะ graw/ โกรง gro-ng/ ฆองคู<br />
khaw-ng khu/ ฆองระเบ็ง<br />
khaw-ng rabay-ng/ ฆองราว khaw-ng rao/ ฆองหุย<br />
khaw-ng hui/ ฆองเหมง khaw-ng may-ng/ ฆอง<br />
โหมง khaw-ng mo-ng/ ฉาบ cha-p / ฉาบเล็ก cha-p lek/ ฉาบใหญ cha-p yai/ ฉิ่ง<br />
ching/<br />
ตะโพน ta- pho-n/ ตะโพนมอญ ta pho-n mow-n/ ทับ thap/ โทน tho-n or thap/ โทนชาตรี tho-n<br />
cha-tri-/ โทนมโหรี tho-n maho-ri-/ บัณเฑาะว ban daw/ เปงมาง per-ng ma-ng/ เปงมางคอก perng<br />
ma-ng khaw-k/ มโหระทึก maho-ra therk/ รํามะนา ram mana-/ โหมง mong/ ขลุย<br />
khlui/ ขลุย<br />
กรวด khlui grua-t/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
khlui phia-ng aw-/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
khlui- li-p / ขลุยอู<br />
khlui-u-/ แตร<br />
trae-/ แตรงอน trae- ngaw-n/ แตรฝรั่ง<br />
trae- farang/ แตรลางโพง trae- la-ng pho-ng/ แตรลําโพง<br />
trae- lam pho-ng/ แตรวิลันดา trae- wilanda-/ ป<br />
pi/ ปกลาง<br />
pi- gla-ng/ ปไฉน<br />
pi-cha nai / ปชวาpi<br />
chawa- / ปนอก<br />
pi –naw-k / ปในpi-nai<br />
/ ปมอญ<br />
pi-maw-n/ ปหอ<br />
pi-haw- / ปออ<br />
pi-aw-/<br />
2. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
phia/ กลองสองหนา song na/<br />
TMMC<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก khaung maun lek/ กลองสองหนา saung naa/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
thume lek/ กลองสองหนา the song na/
TMI<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ saw – li-p/ กลองสองหนา saw-ng na/<br />
3. Transliteration + cultural substitute<br />
TM<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก gong wong lek/ ฆองวงใหญ gong wong yai/ ฆองหุย<br />
the gong hooi/<br />
4. Translation + cultural substitute<br />
TCM<br />
ฆองกลาง medium gong set/ ฆองวงเล็ก small gong set/ ฆองวงใหญ big gong set/<br />
5. Cultural substitute<br />
TCM<br />
Description strategies<br />
ฉาบเล็ก cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ cymbals/<br />
1. Modifiers<br />
1.1 Type<br />
217
TMT<br />
กระจับป<br />
pluck, stringed instrument/ จะเข a stringed instrument/ พิณ a<br />
stringed instrument, / ซอ bowed stringed instruments/ ซอดวง a stringed instrument/ ซอสาม<br />
สาย stringed bowed lute/ ซออู<br />
…bowed stringed instrument/ ขิม stringed instrument/ กรับ<br />
rhythm…,percussion instrument/ กรับพวง a percussion instrument/ กรับเสภา percussion<br />
instrument/ เกราะ …percussion instrument/ โกรง …percussion instrument/ ป<br />
reed instrument/<br />
ปไฉน<br />
..reed instrument/<br />
TMMC<br />
จะเข …three stringed which are plucked…/ พิณ plucked lute-type instruments/<br />
ซอดวง …two-stringed fiddle/ ตะโพน the most important rhythm instrument…/ บัณเฑาะว a<br />
percussion instrument/ ป<br />
reed instrument/<br />
TCM<br />
จะเข plucked string instrument/ ซอดวง string solo fiddle/ ซอสามสาย a threestring<br />
fiddle ซอสามสายหลีบ a three-string fiddle / ซออู<br />
a two-string fiddle/<br />
TMI<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
a stringed instrument…/ป<br />
reed or oboe type/<br />
1.2 Shape<br />
TMT<br />
กระจับป<br />
long-necked…/ พิณ …stick zither…, …half gourd resenator/<br />
218
219<br />
พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
the stick attached to a half-gourd resonator/ ซอดวง …lute with cylindrical resonator/<br />
ซอสามสาย … lute with triangular sound box / ซออู<br />
…lute with triangular sound box/ ซออู<br />
lute with half coconut shell sound box/ ฆอง gong-kettles/ ฆองมอญ …on a crescent-shaped<br />
rack/ ฆองราง …kettles on a straight rack…/ ฆองวง …gong-kettles…/ ฆองวงเล็ก …gongkettles…./<br />
ระนาดเอก …a boat-shaped…/ กรับ …stickes..., cut and polished/ กรับพวง<br />
…several long thin sheets…, …loose pieces tied together/ กรับเสภา …square bar…, about<br />
one half inches wide on each side by eight inches long/ กลองทัด barrel-shaped peg headed<br />
drum/ กลองชาตรี …pegged heads…, the body being about ten inches high, the heads about<br />
eight inches in diameter/ กลองสองหนา two –headed drum./ เกราะ slit drum…with nodes at<br />
each end/ โกรง …slit drum…nodes in length/ ฆองคู<br />
…kettles, small rectangular box frame…/<br />
ฆองราว …gong on a rack/ ฆองหุย<br />
gongs on a rack.., on a tripod stand/ ฆองเหมง …a curved<br />
wooden handle from which it is suspended and struck with a piece of wood…/ ฉาบเล็ก…of flat<br />
metal with a central rounded boss about three-quarters of an inch deep/ ฉิ่ง<br />
…made of thick<br />
metal…like teacups or small hollow cones/ ตะโพน a barrel shaped drum…/ โทน goblet or<br />
inverted vase drum/ บัณเฑาะว …hourglass drum/ เปงมาง …thong-wrapped barrel-shaped<br />
drum/ เปงมางคอก a set of drum on their stand/ รํามะนา a shallow frame drum with one head…/<br />
ขลุย<br />
vertical bamboo flute/ ปกลาง<br />
about fifteen inches long, one and a half inches in diameter/<br />
ปไฉน…<br />
body with conical bore, about a foot long or less/<br />
TMMC<br />
กระจับป<br />
fretted lute/ จะเข fretted lute/ ซอดวง …hardwood cylinder/ ซออู<br />
sound-holes carved into back/ ขิม hammered zither/ ฆองมอญ kettle-shaped, suspended on<br />
upright, u-shaped rack/ ฆองมอญวงเล็ก kettle-shaped, suspended on upright, u-shaped rack/<br />
ฆองวง circular rack of kettle- shaped…/ ฆองวงเล็ก circular rack of kettle- shaped…/ ฆอง<br />
วงใหญ circular rack of kettle- shaped…/ ระนาดทุม<br />
…body is narrow and rectangular, box<br />
–like …/ ระนาดเอก …is boat-shaped/ วงฆองชัย circular rack of vertically suspended gongs,<br />
of different sized and pitches/ กรับเสภา pair of wooden bars…/ กลองแขก…cylindrical, twoheaded<br />
drums/ กลองชนะ decorated in festive colors/ กลองชาตรี goblet-shaped…/ กลองทัด
pair of upright drum, heads tacked on…/ กลองสองหนา cylindrical shaped../ ฆองคู<br />
kettleshaped..inside<br />
a rectangular frame/ ฆองหุย<br />
vertically-suspended…/ ฆองเหมง …suspended<br />
manually…/ ฉาบ …somewhat flatter/ ฉาบเล็ก …somewhat flatter/ ฉาบใหญ …somewhat<br />
flatter/ ตะโพน two headed barrel-shaped drum/ โทน goblet-shaped drum…/บัณเฑาะว two<br />
drumheaded attached to a stick, / เปงมางคอก circle of tuned drums, arranged vertically in a<br />
semicircular frame/ รํามะนา frame drum, with shallow wooden body/ โหมง suspened gong/<br />
ขลุย<br />
vertical flute/ ปมอญ<br />
conical shape/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
steel-resonance bars/<br />
ระนาดเอก wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดเอกทอง steel-resonance bars/ กลองทัด a thick large<br />
drum/ กลองสองหนา a small long drum/ ตะโพน drum-heads covering both ends/ โหมง large<br />
gong/<br />
TMI<br />
แตรงอน curved trumpet/<br />
1.3 Size<br />
TMT<br />
220<br />
ระนาดเอก …on a small pedistal/ กลองทัด large barrel-shaped…/ กลองชาตรี<br />
like the klong that but much smaller/ กลองสองหนา a medium-sized…/ เกราะ small slit<br />
drum…/ โกรง large bamboo…/ ฆองคู…<br />
in a small rectangular box frame/ ฆองเหมง a small<br />
gong…/ ฉาบ medium-sized …/ ฉาบเล็ก a pair of medium-sized cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small metal hand<br />
cymbals/ โทนชาตรี small-size../ บัณเฑาะว small hourglass drum/ เปงมาง a small, thongwrapped…/<br />
รํามะนา a small frame drum../ โหมง a large gong/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
the medium –size…/<br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
the small –size…/ ขลุยอู<br />
the large –size…/
TMMC<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก smaller…/ ฆองคู<br />
a pair of small gong set../ ฆองเหมง small<br />
gong../ ฉาบเล็ก smaller sized/ ฉาบใหญ larger size/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small metal hand –cymbals/ บัณเฑาะว<br />
small two-faced …/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
another size/ ปไฉน<br />
small and high pitched/ ปนอก<br />
shorter in<br />
length/<br />
TM<br />
กลองทัด a thick large drum/ กลองสองหนา a small long drum/ ฉาบเล็ก<br />
medium cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small cymbals/ ตะโพน small hand tympano/ โหมง large gong/<br />
TCM<br />
จะเข a medium size…/ ซอสามสายหลีบ a smaller three-string fiddle…/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small cymbals/ รํามะนา a small hand drum/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
a smaller and higher pitched bamboo<br />
flute/<br />
TMI<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ small size saw/ ฉาบ a pair of small metal cymbals/ ขลุย<br />
เพียงออ the middle-sized khlui/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
the smallest –sized khlui/ ขลุยอู<br />
the largest –sized<br />
khlui/<br />
221
1.4 Sound<br />
TMT<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
low-pitch xylophone/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
low-pitch metallophone/<br />
ระนาดเอก high-pitch xylophone/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก high-pitch metallophone/ กลองมะริกัน<br />
American bass drum/<br />
TMMC<br />
ซอดวง higher-pitched 2 stringed fiddle/ ซออู<br />
lower-pitched 2 stringed fiddle/<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก higher pitched/ ฆองวงเล็ก higher-pitched/ ฆองวงใหญ lower-pitched/ ระนาด<br />
ทุม<br />
lower-pitched/ ระนาดเอก higher pitched/ ตะโพน …to lower head for tuning. Heads tuned<br />
to an interval of approximately one fifth, but not tuned definitely in relation to ensemble/ ปไฉน<br />
high-pitched/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
alto xylophone…/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
alto xylophone…/ ระนาดเอก<br />
treble xylophone…/ ระนาดเอกทอง treble xylophone…/<br />
bamboo flute/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ with higher pitches / ขลุยหลีบ<br />
a smaller and higher pitched<br />
222
1.5 Material<br />
TMT<br />
พิณ one string and a half-gourd resenator/ ซออู<br />
…made from half an ordinary<br />
coconut shell/ ระนาด ..wooden keys…/ กรับ made from pieces of bamboo, …wooden<br />
percussion…/ กรับพวง …long thin sheets of metal…, pieces of wood…/ กรับเสภา …bars of<br />
hardwood.., a wooden percussion…/ กลองแขก leather heads are laced on/ เกราะ… made from<br />
bamboo…/ โกรง …old bamboo…/ ฆองเหมง …by a curved wooden…, with a piece of wood/<br />
ฉาบ …metal hand cymbals/ ฉาบเล็ก …of flat metal…/ ฉิ่ง<br />
…metal hand cymbals/<br />
เปงมาง …thong –wrapped/ ขลุย<br />
..bamboo flute…/ ขลุยเพียงออ…bamboo<br />
flute/ ขลุย<br />
หลีบ…bamboo flute/ ขลุยอู…bamboo<br />
flute/<br />
TMMC<br />
ซอดวง …body made of hardwood.., with snake-skin face/ ซออู<br />
…made of<br />
coconut shell, with leather face/ ระนาดทุม…wooden-keyed<br />
xylophones, …made of bamboo/<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
iron-keyed, metal keyed/ ระนาดเอก wooden-keyed xylophone/ ระนาดเอก<br />
เหล็ก ..iron-keyed, metal-keyed/ กรับเสภา leather heads…/ ฉาบ pair of metal …/ ฉาบเล็ก pair<br />
of metal …/ ฉาบใหญ pair of metal …/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small metal hand –cymbals/ ตะโพน ash and rice<br />
mixture applied…/ โทน ceramic body, leather head laced on…/ รํามะนา frame drum. With<br />
shallow wooden (sometimes ivory) body. Leather head is tacked on/ โหมง metal gong…/ แตร<br />
งอน trumpets made from animal horns/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
steel-resonance bars/ ระนาด<br />
เอก wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดเอกทอง steel-resonance bars/<br />
223
TCM<br />
ระนาด a wooden xylophone/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
with metal keys/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก<br />
with metal keys/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
a bamboo flute/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
a smaller and higher pitched bamboo<br />
flute/<br />
TMI<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
…made from a bottle gourd/ ฉาบ a pair of small metal cymbals/<br />
1.6 Number<br />
TMT<br />
จะเข a three-stringed floor zither/ พิณ …zither with one string…/ พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
…stick zither with four strings/ ซอดวง two-stringed bowed lute…/ ซออู<br />
two-stringed…/ ฆอง<br />
ราง eight ketlles…/ ระนาด set of wooden keys/ กรับพวง …several long thin…/ กรับเสภา two<br />
nearly square bars…/ โกรง …several nodes…/ ฆองราว set of gong…/ ฆองหุย<br />
set of three<br />
gongs…/ ฉาบเล็ก a pair of medium-sized…/ ฉิ่ง<br />
a pair of cymbals/ โทน …with a single head/<br />
เปงมางคอก a set of drum…/ รํามะนา drum with one head/ ป<br />
double reed…/ ปไฉน<br />
double –<br />
reed../<br />
TMMC<br />
จะเข …has three strings…/ ซอดวง 2 stringed fiddle/ ซออู<br />
2 stringed fiddle/<br />
ฆองมอญ set of tuned/ฆองมอญวงเล็ก set of tuned…/ วงฆองชัย a set of seven…/ กรับเสภา pair<br />
of wooden bar/ กลองแขก pair of double headed drum/ กลองแขก two-headed drums/ กลองทัด<br />
pair of upright drum/ ฆองหุย<br />
set of 3, 5, or 7…/ ฉาบเล็ก pair of metal…/ ฉาบใหญ pair of<br />
metal…/ ฉาบ pair of metal…/ ตะโพน double headed drum…, two headed barrel-shaped drum/<br />
224
ตะโพนมอญ two-sided drum/ โทน paired with rammana…/ บัณเฑาะว two –faced drum, two<br />
drumheads…/ ป<br />
double reed instruments/<br />
TM<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
a set of 3, 5, or 7 gongs/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอดวง a two-string solo fiddle/ ซออุ<br />
a two-string accompanying fiddle/ กลอง<br />
ทัด twin drums/ ตะโพน two-sided drum/<br />
TMI<br />
กลองตะโพน two ta pho-n drums/ ฉาบ a pair of small metal cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
a pair<br />
of cymbals/ เปงมางคอก a group of seven per-ng ma-ng drums/<br />
1.7 Hyphenated<br />
TMT<br />
กระจับป<br />
long-necked…/ จะเข a three-stringed floor zither…, a zither-type…/<br />
พิณ a stick zither-type stringed instrument/ พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
half-gourd…/ ซอดวง two-stringed bowed<br />
lute…/ ซอสามสาย … three-stringed…/ ซออู<br />
two-stringed…/ฆอง gong-kettles/ ขิม …zithertype…/ฆองกลาง<br />
medium-sized circle of gongs/ฆองมอญ …on a crescent-shaped rack/ ฆองราง<br />
gong-kettles/ ฆองวง gong-kettles/ ฆองวงเล็ก …gong-kettles…./ ฆองวงใหญ gong-circle/ ระนาด<br />
ทุม<br />
low-pitch/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
low-pitch/ ระนาดเอก low-pitch/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก high-pitch/ กลอง<br />
ชวา Javanese-derived drum/ กลองทัด barrel-shaped drum/ กลองสองหนา two-headed drum,<br />
hand-played drum/ ฆองคู<br />
a pair of gong-kettles/ ฆองเหมง hand-held gong/ ฉาบ medium-size…/<br />
ฉาบเล็ก ..medium-sized/ ฉาบใหญ large –sized/ ตะโพน a barrel –shaped/ โทน ..vase –shaped/<br />
225
โทนชาตรี small-sized/ เปงมาง thong-wrapped barrel-shaped/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
medium-sized/ ขลุย<br />
หลีบ small-sized/ ขลุยอู<br />
large-sized/ ป<br />
double-reed…/ปกลาง<br />
medium-sized pi/ ปไฉน<br />
doublereed…/<br />
ปมอญ<br />
mon-style pi/<br />
TMMC<br />
จะเข ..zither-type/ พิณ plucked lute-type instruments/ ซอดวง higher-pitched../<br />
ซอสามสาย three-stringed fiddle/ ซออู<br />
lower-pitched/ ขิม dulcimer-like instrument/ ฆองมอญ<br />
kettle- shaped/ ฆองมอญวงเล็ก kettle- shaped/ ฆองวง kettle-shaped/ ฆองวงเล็ก kettle-shaped,<br />
small gong-circle /ฆองวงใหญ kettle-shaped, large gong-circle/ ระนาดทุม<br />
lower-pitched,<br />
wooden-keyed/ ระนาดเอก wooden-keyed…/ระนาดเอกเหล็ก ..iron-keyed, metal-keyed/ วงฆอง<br />
ชัย …vertically-suspended…/ กลองแขก two-headed drums/ ฆองหุย<br />
vertically-suspended…/<br />
ฉาบ …metal hand-cymbals/ ฉาบเล็ก …metal hand-cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ …metal hand-cymbals/<br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
small metal hand –cymbals/ ตะโพนมอญ two-sided drum/ บัณเฑาะว two –faced drum/ ขลุย<br />
vertically –held flute/ ป<br />
oboe-like instrument/ ปไฉน<br />
high-pitched/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
steel-resonance bars/ ระนาด<br />
เอก wooden-resonance bars/ ระนาดเอกทอง steel-resonance bars/ ตะโพน drum-heads covering<br />
both ends/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอดวง a two-string solo fiddle/ ซอสามสาย a three-string fiddle ซอสามสาย<br />
หลีบ a three-string fiddle / ซออู<br />
a two-string fiddle/ ตะโพน two-sided drum/<br />
TMI<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
the middle-sized khlui/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
the smallest –sized khlui/ ขลุยอู<br />
226
the largest –sized khlui/<br />
2. Translation<br />
TMT<br />
จะเข crocodile/ ซอสามสาย …three-stringed bowed lute/ ฆองกลาง mediumsized<br />
circle of gongs/ ฆองวง ..circle of gong-kettles/ ฆองวงเล็ก small circle of gongs, small set<br />
of gong-kettles, small gong-circle/ ฆองวงใหญ large circle of gong, large gong-circle/ ระนาดเอก<br />
เหล็ก iron ranat ek/ กลองแขก Indian drum/ กลองชวา Javanese drum/ กลองมะริกัน American<br />
bass drum/ กลองมลายู Malayan drum/ กลองยาว drum/ กลองสองหนา two faces/ ฆองคู<br />
a pair of<br />
gong-kettles/ ฉาบใหญ large –sized cymbals/ ตะโพนมอญ the mon model of the taphon/ ปกลาง<br />
medium-sized pi/ ปชวา<br />
Javanese oboe/ ปนอก<br />
outdoor pi/ ปใน<br />
indoor pi/ ปมอญ<br />
mon –style pi)<br />
TMMC<br />
ซอสามสาย three-stringed fiddle/ ฆองมอญ Mon gongs/ ฆองวง gong circle/ฆองวง<br />
เล็ก small gong-circle/ ฆองวงใหญ large gong-circle/ ระนาดทุม<br />
ranaat is xylophone, thum<br />
translated to be low or deep in tone/ ระนาดเอก ranaat is xylophone, eek means first, or one/<br />
กลองมลายู Malay drum/ กลองสองหนา two-faced drum/ ฆองคู<br />
a pair of small gong set../ ปกลาง<br />
medium pii/ ปชวา<br />
Javanese pii/ ปนอก<br />
the outside pii/ ปใน<br />
the inside pii/ ปมอญ<br />
Mon pii/<br />
TM<br />
ฉาบเล็ก small cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ large cymbals/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอสามสาย a three-string fiddle/ ซอสามสายหลีบ a smaller three-string fiddle with<br />
higher pitches/<br />
227
TMI<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก small circle of gong/ ฆองวงใหญ large circle of gong/ วงฆองชัย circle of<br />
khaw-ng chai gongs/ กรับคู<br />
pair of grap/ กรับพวง cluster or bunch of grap/ กลองชวา Javanese<br />
drums/ กลองมะริกัน American drum/ กลองสองหนา two drumheads/ ฆองคู<br />
a pair of gong/<br />
3. Partial translation<br />
TMMC<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก gong circle, mon gongs/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
lek is iron/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก<br />
lek is iron/<br />
4. Transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก iron ranat ek/ ตะโพนมอญ the mon model of the taphon/ ปกลาง<br />
medium-sized pi/ ปชวา<br />
Javanese pi/ ปนอก<br />
outdoor pi/ ปใน<br />
indoor pi/ ปมอญ<br />
mon –style pi/<br />
TMMC<br />
ปกลาง<br />
medium pii/ ปชวา<br />
Javanese pii/ ปนอก<br />
the outside pii/ ปใน<br />
the inside pii/ ป<br />
มอญ Mon pii/<br />
TMI<br />
วงฆองชัย circle of khaw-ng chai gongs/ กรับพวง cluster or bunch of grap/ กลอง<br />
ตะโพน two ta pho-n drums/ กลองมะริกัน glaw-ng amay-ri gan/<br />
228
5. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
a type of phin/ โทนมโหรี the thon drum…/<br />
TMMC<br />
เปงมางคอก each a peeng maang/<br />
TMI<br />
229<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ small size saw/ เปงมางคอก a group of seven per-ng ma-ng drums/<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
the middle-sized khlui/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
the smallest –sized khlui/ ขลุยอู<br />
the largest –sized<br />
khlui/<br />
6. Cultural substitute<br />
TMT<br />
กระจับป<br />
lute/ จะเข zither/ พิณ zither/ พิณเพี๊ยะ<br />
zither/ ซอดวง lute/ ซอสามสาย lute/<br />
ซออู<br />
lute/ ฆอง gong/ ขิม zither/ฆองกลาง gong/ ฆองมอญ gong/ ฆองราง gong/ ฆองวง gong/<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก gong/ ฆองวงใหญ gong/ ระนาด xylophone/ ระนาดทอง metallaphone/ ระนาดทุม<br />
xylophone/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
metallophone/ ระนาดเอก xylophone/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก metallophone/<br />
กลอง drum/ กลองแขก drum/ กลองชวา drum/ กลองชาตรี drum/ กลองทัด drum/ กลองมะริกัน<br />
drum/ กลองมลายู drum/ กลองยาว long drum/ กลองสองหนา drum/ เกราะ drum/ โกรง drum/<br />
ฆองคู<br />
gong/ ฆองระเบ็ง gong/ ฆองราว gong/ ฆองหุย<br />
gong/ ฆองเหมง gong/ ฉาบ cymbals/ ฉาบ<br />
เล็ก cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
cymbals/ ตะโพน drum/ โทน drum/ โทนชาตรี drum/ โทน
มโหรี drum/ บัณเฑาะว drum/ เปงมาง drum/ เปงมางคอก drum/ รํามะนา drum/ โหมง gong/ ขลุย<br />
flute/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
flute/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
flute/ ขลุยอู<br />
flute/ ปชวา<br />
oboe/<br />
TMMC<br />
กระจับป<br />
lute/ จะเข zither/ พิณ lute/ ซอดวง fiddle/ ซอสามสาย fiddle/ ซออู<br />
fiddle/ ขิม<br />
zither/ฆองมอญ gong/ ฆองมอญวงเล็ก gong/ ฆองวง gong/ ฆองวงเล็ก gong / ฆองวงใหญ gong/<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
xylophone/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
xylophone/ ระนาดเอก xylophone/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก<br />
xylophone/ วงฆองชัย gong/ กลองแขก drum/ กลองชนะ drum/ กลองชาตรี drum/ กลองทัด drum/<br />
กลองมลายู drum/ กลองสองหนา drum/ ฉิ่ง<br />
cymbals/ ฆองคู<br />
gong/ ฆองหุย<br />
gong/ ฆองเหมง gong/<br />
ฉาบ cymbals/ ฉาบเล็ก cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ cymbals/ ตะโพน drum/ ตะโพนมอญ two-sided drum/<br />
โทน drum/ บัณเฑาะว drum/ เปงมางคอก drum/ รํามะนา drum/ โหมง gong/ ขลุย<br />
flute/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
flute/ แตรงอน trumpets/ ปมอญ<br />
oboe/<br />
TM<br />
กลองทัด drum/ กลองสองหนา drum/ ฆองหุย<br />
gong/ ฉาบเล็ก cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ<br />
cymbals ฉิ่ง<br />
cymbals/ ตะโพน drum/ โหมง gong/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอดวง fiddle/ ซอสามสาย fiddle ซอสามสายหลีบ fiddle / ซออู<br />
fiddle/ กลองทัด drums/<br />
ฉิ่ง<br />
cymbals/ ตะโพน drum/ ระนาด xylophone/ รํามะนา drum/ ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
flute/ ขลุยหลีบ<br />
flute/<br />
TMI<br />
ฆอง gong/ ฆองวงเล็ก gong/ ฆองวงใหญ gong/ วงฆองชัย gongs/ กลอง drum/ กลองชวา<br />
drums/ กลองตะโพน drums/ กลองมะริกัน drum/ กลองสองหนา drum/ ฆองคู<br />
gong/ ฉาบ<br />
cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
cymbals/ เปงมางคอก drum/ ขลุย<br />
flute/ แตรงอน trumpet/ แตรฝรั่ง<br />
trumpet/ ป<br />
oboe/<br />
230
7. Generic word<br />
TMT<br />
กลองแขก foreign drum/<br />
8. Specific word<br />
TMI<br />
แตรฝรั่ง<br />
European trumpet/<br />
9. Similar Western instrument<br />
TMMC<br />
ป<br />
oboe-like instrument/<br />
TM<br />
231<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก Celesta/ ฆองวงใหญ Resonophone or Tubaphone or Glockenspiel/ ระนาด<br />
ทุม<br />
Alto Xylophone with wooden-resonance bars or Marimba/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
Alto xylophone<br />
with steel-resonance bars/ ระนาดเอก Treble Xylophone with wooden-bars/ ระนาดเอกทอง Treble<br />
Xylophone with steel-resonance bars/ กลองทัด Timpani/ ฉาบเล็ก Small cymbals, medium<br />
cymbals/ ฉาบใหญ Large cymbals/ ฉิ่ง<br />
Small cymbals/ ตะโพน small hand tympano/ โหมง tomtom<br />
or gong/ ปใน<br />
Oboe or Piano –accordion or C Clarinet/
10. Implement used in playing<br />
TMT<br />
ฆองเหมง …or a padded beater/<br />
TMMC<br />
กระจับป<br />
strummed with a plectrum held in the performer’s hand/ จะเข …plucked<br />
with a plectrum…/ ฆองวง …played with two mallets/ ฆองวงเล็ก …played with two mallets /<br />
ฆองวงใหญ …played with two mallets/ ระนาดเอก …played with pair of mallets/ กลองทัด hit<br />
with sticks/ ฆองเหมง …hit with a mallet or stick/<br />
11. Ensemble in which used<br />
TMT<br />
ฆองระเบ็ง …used for the rabeng…/ ตะโพน …used in pi phat (percussion)<br />
ensemble/ โทนมโหรี…used in mahori ensemble/<br />
TMMC<br />
232<br />
กระจับป<br />
..not used in standard contemporary ensembles/ จะเข …appears in<br />
mahorii and khruang saay ensembles…/ ซอสามสาย used in mahoorii ensembles and in solo<br />
and solo plus vocal, repetoire/ขิม …can be performed solo or added to mahoorii and<br />
khruang saay ensembles/ ฆองมอญ appeared in the piiphaat maun/ ฆองมอญวงเล็ก appeared in<br />
the piiphaat maun/ ฆองวง …in piiphaat ensemble/ฆองวงเล็ก … in piiphaat ensemble /ฆอง<br />
วงใหญ … in piiphaat ensemble/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
used only in the larger-sized piiphaat<br />
ensembles, used in the larger piiphaat ensembles/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก used only in the larger-sized<br />
piiphaat ensembles, used in the larger piiphaat ensembles / วงฆองชัย used in piiphaat
dukdamban ensemble/ กรับเสภา …for recited epic genre, seephaa/ กลองแขก commomly<br />
substituted for taphoon in piiphaat ensemmbles and thoon rammanaa in mahoorii and khruang<br />
saay ensembles/ กลองชนะ… but appearing in the rare pageant ensemble, tree sang klaung<br />
chana/ กลองชาตรี …unique to the piiphaat chaatrii…/ กลองทัด appear in the piiphaat<br />
ensemble/ กลองมลายู appear in the rare ensembles, wong bua lauy and wong piiphaat naang<br />
hong…/ กลองสองหนา often substituted for taphoon in the piiphaat ensemble serving as vocal<br />
accompaniment/ ฆองคู<br />
appear in the “light” version of the smallest size of piiphaat ensembles/<br />
ฆองหุย…<br />
used in piiphaat…/ ฆองเหมง appeared in historical ensembles/ ฉาบ used to<br />
emphasize important metric pulses in larger piiphaat ensembles/ ฉาบเล็ก used to emphasize<br />
important metric pulses in larger piiphaat ensembles/ ฉาบใหญ used to emphasize important<br />
metric pulses in larger piiphaat ensembles/ ฉิ่ง<br />
…ubiquitous in Thai classical music…/<br />
ตะโพน …used in piiphaat ensemble/ เปงมางคอก used in the piiphaat maun ensemble/ โหมง<br />
appears in some of the larger sized standard ensembles/ ขลุย<br />
also appears in khruang saay<br />
ensemble, and in the “soft” version of piiphaat ensembles/ ป<br />
…used in piiphaat ensembles/<br />
ปชวา<br />
appears in certain special ensembles, including the piiphaat naang hong, and the wong<br />
khruang saay pii chaawaa/ ปมอญ<br />
used only in the piiphaat naun/<br />
12. Occasion played<br />
TMT<br />
ฆองระเบ็ง …type of vocal entertainment music/<br />
TMMC<br />
พิณ occasionally used in folk-influenced urban pop music/ กลองชาตรี once used<br />
for the dramatic genre lakhaun chaatrii, today accompanying southern-style (“chaatrii” or<br />
“nooraa”) epic drama/ กลองมลายู …are used in cremation ceremonies/ ฆองหุย…<br />
used in<br />
piiphaat during certain epic episodes/ โทนชาตรี…to accompany shadow theater and lakhaun<br />
nooraa/ ขลุย<br />
used in the public schools for music education/ ปกลาง<br />
used to accompany<br />
233
shadow theater/ ปไฉน<br />
formerly used in processions/ ปชวา<br />
…to accompany Thai boxing/ ป<br />
นอก associated with lakhaun nauk (“outside” dance drama- performed outside of the royal<br />
palace/ ปใน<br />
it was associated with the khoon (masked- dance-drama) and lakhaun nay<br />
(“inside” dance-drama) once confined to the palaces.<br />
13. Origin of name (instrument)<br />
TMT<br />
ระจับป<br />
origin unknown, name from Sanskrit/ พิณ India, from Sanskrit/ ขิม a<br />
Chinese yang ch’in/ กลองแขก Indian drum/กลองชวา Javanese-derived drum/ กลองมะริกัน<br />
American bass drum/ ตะโพนมอญ the mon model…/ โทน …vase drum; India , from “dhol”?/<br />
บัณเฑาะว …hourglass drum; India; Pali: “panawa”/ ปไฉน<br />
…India/ ปชวา<br />
Javanese pi/<br />
TMMC<br />
ขิม …from China…/ ฆองมอญ Mon gongs/ กลองมลายู Malay drum/<br />
TMI<br />
กลองชวา Javanese drums/แตรฝรั่ง<br />
European trumpet/<br />
14. Position in ensemble<br />
TMT<br />
234<br />
จะเข three-stringed floor zither/ พิณเพี<br />
๊ยะ which is placed against the vare chest of the<br />
performer during performance/ ฆองวง …gong-kettles on a stand/ ระนาด set of wooden keys on a<br />
stand/ กรับ a pair is held in each hand/ กรับพวง held in the right hand…/ กลองสองหนา … hand
play drum../ ฆองราว …gongs on a stand/ ฆองหุย<br />
gong on a tripod stand/ ฆองเหมง …hand-held<br />
gong/ ฉาบ …metal hand cymbles/ ฉิ่ง<br />
small hand cymbals/ ตะโพน …drum on a stand/<br />
บัณเฑาะว …hand drum/ เปงมางคอก a set of drum on their stand/<br />
TMMC<br />
จะเข…lies horizontally on the floor/ ฆองวง lies hozontally on the floor, performer<br />
sits inside the circle/ ฆองวงเล็ก lies hozontally on the floor, performer sits inside the circle /ฆอง<br />
วงใหญ lies hozontally on the floor, performer sits inside the circle/ กรับเสภา held in each hand<br />
of a performer/ กลองแขก held on laps of two separate players, held horizontally across<br />
performer’s laps/ ฆองคู…<br />
gongs set in a box/ ฉาบ …metal hand-cymbals/ ฉาบเล็ก …metal<br />
hand-cymbals// ฉาบใหญ …metal hand-cymbals/ บัณเฑาะว hand –held drum/ โหมง metal gong<br />
suspended from tripod/ ขลุย<br />
vertically –held flute/<br />
15. Other names<br />
TMT<br />
ระนาดทอง original name of ranat ek lek/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก ranat ek lek or ranat<br />
thong/ ฆองราว khong rao or khong hui/ ฆองหุย<br />
khong rao or khong hui/<br />
TMMC<br />
ฆองราว khaung raaw (khaung huy)/ ฆองหุย<br />
huy or khaung huy/ โทน sometimes<br />
called thoon mahorii…/ โหมง moong or khaung moong/<br />
TM<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
ranad thume or thume mai/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
ranad thong thume or thume<br />
lek/ ระนาดเอกทอง ranad thong ek or thume lek/ กลองสองหนา …and also called Poeng Mang/<br />
235
TMI<br />
ระนาดทอง rana-t thaw-ng or rana-t ay-k lek/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก rana-t thaw-ng or ranat<br />
ay-k lek/ ฆองหุย<br />
khaw-mui or khaw-ng hui/<br />
16. Function<br />
TMT<br />
กรับ rhythm…/<br />
TMMC<br />
ซอดวง …melodically dominant/ ซออู<br />
melodically dominant/ ฆองมอญวงเล็ก<br />
melodically subordinate instrument/ ฆองวง fills important leadership role in piiphaat ensemble/<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก fills important leadership role in piiphaat ensemble/ฆองวงใหญ fills important<br />
leadership role in piiphaat ensemble/ ระนาดทุม<br />
…melodically subordinate/ ระนาด<br />
เอก …melodically dominant/ วงฆองชัย the gong pitched outline the main melodic pitches of<br />
songs/ กรับเสภา …held in each hand of a performer. Clacked together to produce rhythmic<br />
accompaniment…/ กลองแขก commmonly substituted for taphoon in piiphaat ensembles and<br />
thoon rammanaa in mahoorii and khruang saay ensembles/ กลองสองหนา replaces the taphoon<br />
in certain types of piiphaat ensemble repertoire, ..serving as vocal accompaniment/ ฉาบ used to<br />
emphasize important metric pulses…/ ฉาบเล็ก used to emphasize important metric pulses…,<br />
used more frequently/ ฉาบ ใหญ used to emphasize important metric pulses…/ ฉิ่ง<br />
mark<br />
important metric pluses which indicate chan/ โทน …conceived of as one unit musically.<br />
Hence they are referred to in conjunction, thoon/rammanaa/ รํามะนา played simultaneously by<br />
one person, and conceived of as one unit musically. Hence they are referred to in conjunction,<br />
thoon/rammanaa. Paired with thoon and played by a single musician, for the rhythmic parts of the<br />
two form one pattern/ ขลุย<br />
commonly used as a solo instrument/<br />
236
TM<br />
กลองสองหนา …used in conjunction with other instruments/<br />
TCM<br />
ซอดวง a two-string solo fiddle/ ซออุ<br />
a two-string accompanying fiddle/<br />
17. How played<br />
TMT<br />
กรับพวง …held in the right hand and slapped against the palm of the left/<br />
TMMC<br />
กระจับป<br />
strummed with a plectrum held in the performer’s hand/ ซอดวง the<br />
strings are not depressed against a fingerboard to produce pitches. Bow “attached” to<br />
instrument by being strung through the instrument’s strings/ กรับเสภา …held in each hand<br />
of a performer. Clacked together to produce rhythmic accompaniment…/บัณเฑาะว sound by<br />
balls attached to strings when rolled between the hands/<br />
18. Region where played<br />
TMT<br />
กลองชาตรี drum used in the southern theater, a drum of southern Thailand/ โทน<br />
ชาตรี a drum of south Thailand/<br />
237
TMMC<br />
พิณ …associated with Northern Thai folk music/ กลองชาตรี …accompanying<br />
southern-style …/ โทนชาตรี …played in pair in southern Thailand…/<br />
19. Age<br />
TMT<br />
เกราะ an old bamboo…/ โกรง an old bamboo…/ ฆองระเบ็ง ..an ancient type of …/<br />
ปไฉน<br />
early double-reed…/<br />
TMMC<br />
ฆองเหมง appeared in historical ensembles/<br />
20. Reference to other instruments<br />
TMT<br />
238<br />
พิณ Indian names for a plucked lute: vina (south India) and bina (north India) / กลอง<br />
ชาตรี …like the klong that but much smaller…/ ฆองคู<br />
…similar to those used on the khong<br />
wong/ โทนชาตรี …small-size klong that/ รํามะนา about the size of a Western tambourine but<br />
without the “jangles” /<br />
TMMC<br />
ซออู<br />
…as on sau duang/ ขิม dulcimer-like instrument/ ระนาดทุม<br />
…compared to the<br />
ranaat eek/ ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
…are musical partners to the wooden ones above…(referring to<br />
ระนาด)/ ระนาดเอกเหล็ก .. are musical partners to the wooden ones above…(referring to
239<br />
ระนาด)/ กลองแขก commonly substituted for taphoon in piiphaat ensembles and thoon<br />
rammanaa in mahoorii and khruang saay ensembles/ กลองชนะ similar to the klaung<br />
kheek…/ กลองมลายู similar in appearance to the klaung kheek/ กลองสองหนา ..replaced the<br />
the taphoon, in contrast to the barrel shape of the taphoon/ ฉาบ …larger than the ching…/ ฉาบ<br />
เล็ก …larger than the ching…/ ฉาบใหญ …larger than the ching…/ โทนชาตรี …similar to above<br />
but played in pairs in southern Thailand (above means thoon mahoorii/ รํามะนา Hence they are<br />
referred to in conjunction, thoon/rammanaa/ ปชวา<br />
…and along wih klaung kheek, to<br />
accompany Thai boxing/ ปนอก<br />
shorter in length than the pii nay/<br />
21. Parts of instrument<br />
TMT<br />
ขลุย<br />
…with pegged mouthpiece…/<br />
22. About players<br />
TMMC<br />
กลองแขก played in pairs by two performers/ กลองทัด played by single performer/<br />
กลองมลายู played in pairs/ ตะโพน of ritual significance, and not played by females/ โทน<br />
played simultaneously by one person…, by a single musician/ รํามะนา played simultaneously by<br />
one person…, played by a single musician/<br />
23. Citation<br />
TMMC<br />
พิณ Morton explains that in former times the word was a cover term for all lutetype…/<br />
ปกลาง<br />
… Morton use to accompany shadow theater/
The lists of strategies used in presenting Thai musical ensembles<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMMC<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
wong khruang saay/ วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
wong khruang saay khruang<br />
khuu/ วงเครื่องสายผสมไวโอลิน<br />
wong khruang saay prasom violin/ วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
wong piiphaat<br />
chaatrii/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
wong piiphaat dukdaman/ วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
wong piiphaat nang<br />
hong/ วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
wong piiphaat maun/<br />
TCM<br />
240<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
wong khre-a-ng sai, khre-a-ng khu/ วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
wong<br />
khre-a-ng sai wong lek/ วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
wong pi-phat khre-a-ng khu/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
wong<br />
pi-phat khre-a-ng ha/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
wong pi-phat, khre-a-ng yai/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
wong pi-phat, duk –dam-bun/ วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
wong mahori-khre-a-ng lek/ วงมโหรีเครื่องหก<br />
wong mahori khre-a-ng hok/<br />
2. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
khruang sai/ วงบัวลอย bua loi/ วงปพาทย<br />
pi phat/ วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
khruang khu/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
khruang ha/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
khruang yai/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
pi<br />
phat mai nuam/ วงมโหรี mahori/
TMMC<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
khruang khuu/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
khruang haa/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
khruang yay/ วงปพาทยมอญเครื่องคู<br />
piiphaat naun khruang khuu/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
may nuam/<br />
TMI<br />
ปพาทยรามัญ<br />
pi-pha-t ra-man/ วงกลองแขกปชวา<br />
glaw-ng khae-k pi-chawa-/ วงปชวา<br />
กลองแขก pi-chawa glaw-ng khae-k/ วงเถิดเทิง, วงเทิงบองกลองยาว ther-t ther-ng or ther-ng baw-ng<br />
klaw-ng yao-/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบีรรพ<br />
pi-pha-t derk dam-ban/ วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
pi-pha-t maw-n/<br />
3. Translation<br />
TCM<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
the string ensemble/<br />
4. Transliteration+translation<br />
TMT<br />
วงกลองแขก klong khaek ensemble/ วงขับไม khap mai ensemble/ วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
small khruang sai ensemble/ วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
pi phat nang hong ensemble/ วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
pi phat<br />
mon ensemble/ วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
small mahori ensemble/ วงมโหรีเครื่องใหญ<br />
large mahori<br />
ensemble/<br />
241
TM<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
piphat band/<br />
TCM<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
the pi-phat ensemble/ วงมโหรี the mahori ensemble/<br />
TMI<br />
242<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
khrer-ng sai- (string) ensemble/ วงบัวลอย bua law-i ensemble/ วงปพาทย<br />
pi-pha-t (percussion) ensemble/ วงปพาทยชาตรี<br />
pi-pha-t cha-tri- ensemble/ วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
pi-phat<br />
na-ng hong ensemble/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
pi- pha-t mainuam ensemble/ วงมโหรี maho-ri- (mixed and<br />
string and percussion) ensemble/<br />
5. Transliteration+translation+size<br />
TMT<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or doubled khruang sai ensemble/ วงมโหรีเครื่องคู<br />
medium sized or doubled mahori ensemble/<br />
6. Partial transliteration+partial translation<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยอยางเบา<br />
light piphat/ วงปพาทยอยางหนัก<br />
heavy pi phat/
7. Partial transliteration+age<br />
TMT<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องสี่<br />
original mahori/<br />
TM<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องสี่<br />
wong mahori boran or ancient mahori<br />
8. Used both transliteration and partial transliteration<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม khap may or wong khap may/ วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
khruang saay pii chaawaa,<br />
wong khruang saay pii chaawaa/ วงบัวลอย bua lauy or wong bua lauy/ วงปพาทย<br />
piiphaat or wong<br />
piiphaat/วงมโหรี mahoorii (wong) mahoorii/<br />
Description strategies<br />
1. Modifiers<br />
1.1 Type<br />
TMMC<br />
วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
a standard type of stringed ensemble with pii chaawaa added/ วง<br />
243
ปพาทย<br />
an ensemble of percussion instruments and the pii or oboe, melodic percussive ensemble/ วง<br />
ปพาทยชาตรี<br />
specialized ensemble/<br />
TCM<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium sized percussion ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
small<br />
percussion ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
large percussion ensemble/<br />
TMI<br />
1.2 Size<br />
วงปพาทย<br />
pi-pha-t (percussion) ensemble<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or doubled ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
a small<br />
ensemble “of five instrument”/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
medium- sized (lit.paired) ensemble of string instruments/ วงป<br />
พาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium size, khruang khuu…/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
small size, khruang haa/ วงมโหรี …<br />
characterized by instruments of smaller size…/<br />
244
TCM<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium sized percussion ensemble/วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
small<br />
percussion ensemble/<br />
1.3 Hyphenated<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or doubled ensemble/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม a three-stringed fiddle/ วงเครื่องสาย<br />
wong khruang saay-ensemble…/ วงป<br />
พาทยเครื่องหา<br />
the five-instrument…/ วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
the Mon-derived ensemble/<br />
2. Translation<br />
TMT<br />
วงขับไม Literally “to recite or sing with a beat” or more figuratively “to perform on<br />
musical instrument.”/ วงเครื่องสาย<br />
the ensemble composed of stringed instruments…/ วงปพาทย<br />
เครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or doubled ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
large group of instrument/ วงป<br />
พาทยไมนวม the pi phat ensemble using padded sticks/<br />
245
TMMC<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
an ensemble of stringed instruments/ วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
medium sized<br />
(lit.paired) ensemble of string instruments/ วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
a standard type of stringed ensemble<br />
with pii chaawaa added/ วงบัวลอย floating lotus ensemble/ วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
the Mon-derived<br />
ensemble/<br />
TCM<br />
ensemble/<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
doubled string ensemble/ วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
small string<br />
TMI<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
khrer-ng sai- (string) ensemble<br />
3. Partial translation<br />
TMT<br />
วงบัวลอย an old ensemble/ / วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
literally, “five instruments”/ วงปพาทย<br />
นางหงส the pi phat funeral ensemble/ วงมโหรี an ensemble …/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม historical ensemble…/ วงปพาทย<br />
an ensemble of percussion instruments and<br />
the pii or oboe/วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
instrument; paired/วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
instrument; five,…the five -<br />
instrument/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
instrument; large/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
ensemble which<br />
246
accompanies …/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
stick/soft; indicates the soft version of piiphaat/ วงมโหรี a<br />
standard type of ensemble/<br />
TCM<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium sized percussion ensemble/วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
small<br />
percussion ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
large percussion ensemble/ วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
small<br />
ensemble…/<br />
4. Transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium-sized or doubled piphat ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
large<br />
pi phat ensemble/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
the pi phat ensemble using padded sticks/<br />
5. Partial transliteration<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
the pi phat funeral ensemble/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
medium size, khruang khuu…/วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
small size, khruang<br />
haa,..piphaat ensemble/ วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
large size khruang yay/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
stick/soft;<br />
indicates the soft version of piiphaat/<br />
247
6. Component instruments (for ensembles)<br />
TMT<br />
วงเครื่องสาย<br />
the ensemble composed of stringed instruments, flute, and rhythmic<br />
percussion/ วงปพาทย<br />
an ensemble composed of melodic and rhythmic percussion instruments and<br />
the pi/ วงปพาทยไมนวม<br />
the pi phat ensemble using padded sticks/ วงมโหรี an ensemble composed<br />
of melodic and rhythmic percussion instruments and flute/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม …consisting ofsolo vocalist,sau saam saay,andbanthau/ วงเครื่องสาย<br />
drums<br />
and hand cymbals, and khluy or flute…/ วงเครื่องสายปชวา<br />
a standard type of stringed ensemble with<br />
pii chaawaa added/ วงบัวลอย consists of pii chaawaa and rhythmic accompaniment/ วงปพาทย<br />
an<br />
ensemble of percussion instruments and the pii or oboe, melodic percussive ensemble, which does not<br />
include stringed instruments/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
a distinctive feature of this ensemble is the wong<br />
khaung chay, seven tuned gongs vertically suspended in a frame…/ วงปพาทยมอญ…plus<br />
the set of<br />
tuned drums, peeng maang khauk/ วงมโหรี …including both stringed and melodix percussive<br />
instruments/<br />
TCM<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื่องคู<br />
another instrument of each kind is added, making a pair/ วง<br />
เครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
one instrument of each kind only is used…/ วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
another instrument of<br />
each kind is added, making a pair/ วงปพาทยเครื่องหา<br />
consisting of five instruments and the Ching/<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ<br />
all the important percussion instruments are included/ วงมโหรีเครื่อง<br />
เล็ก …consisting of both string and percussion type instruments/<br />
248
TMI<br />
วงมโหรี maho-ri- (mixed and string and percussion) ensemble/<br />
7. Component ensembles (for ensembles)<br />
TMMC<br />
วงมโหรี a combination of khruang saay and piiphaat ensembles/<br />
8. Occasion played<br />
TMT<br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
the pi phat funeral ensemble/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม today played occasionally by university students/ วงบัวลอย use in cremation<br />
ceremonies for royalty and has its own specific repertoire/ วงปพาทย<br />
accompanies rituals and<br />
theatrical genres but can also perform entertainment music/ วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
ensemble which<br />
accompanies the dramatic genre, lakhaun dukdamban, …./ วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
…ensemble formerly<br />
used in cremation ceremonies, but rare today/ วงปพาทยมอญ…<br />
commonly played at cremation<br />
ceremonies…/<br />
249
9. Origin of name (ensemble)<br />
TMMC<br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
the Mon-derived ensemble/<br />
10. Other names<br />
TMI<br />
วงกลองแขกปชวา<br />
pi-chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ng khae-k pi-chawa-/ วงปชวา<br />
กลองแขก pi-chawa glaw-ng khae-k or glaw-ng khae-k pi-chawa-/<br />
11. Age<br />
TMT<br />
วงขับไม an old ensemble/ วงบัวลอย an old ensemble/<br />
TMMC<br />
วงขับไม historical ensemble<br />
12. Comparison to other ensembles<br />
TMMC<br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
… which shares certain similarities to Burmese ensembles…/<br />
250
TCM<br />
วงเครื่องสายวงเล็ก<br />
one instrument of each kind only is used compable to the pi-phat<br />
khre-a-ng ha/<br />
13. Citation<br />
TMMC<br />
วงเครื<br />
่องสาย Morton’s “rhythmic percussion”…/ วงบัวลอยMorton views this as the<br />
precursor to the wong piiphaat naang hong/ วงมโหรี Jeradithaporn…, Morton…/<br />
251
The lists of strategies used in presenting types of Thai musical instruments<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
1. Transliteration<br />
TMMC<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
khruang ditt/ เครื่องสี<br />
khruang sii/ เครื่องตี<br />
khruang tii/ เครื่องเปา<br />
khruang paw/<br />
2. Translation<br />
TMT<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
stringed instruments/ เครื่องตีดําเนินทํานอง<br />
melodic percussion/ เครื่องตีกํากับ<br />
จังหวะ rhythmic percussion/<br />
TM<br />
เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
melodic instruments/ เครื่องกํากับจังหวะ<br />
rhythmic instruments/<br />
เครื่องตี<br />
percussion section/<br />
TCM<br />
เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
melodic instruments/ เครื่องกํากับจังหวะ<br />
rhythmic instruments/<br />
252
TMI<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
stringed instruments/ เครื่องตี<br />
percussion instruments/ เครื่องเปา<br />
wind<br />
instruments/<br />
3. Partial translation<br />
TMT<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked/ เครื่องสี<br />
bowed/<br />
TMMC<br />
เครื่องสาย<br />
strings/<br />
4. Translation+material<br />
TM<br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
wood-wind section/<br />
TMI<br />
เครื่องหนัง<br />
percussion instruments using skin or leather/<br />
5. Translation+type<br />
253
TMI<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked stringed instruments /เครื่องสี<br />
bowed stringed instruments/<br />
6. Partial translation+material<br />
TMT<br />
Description strategies<br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
woodwinds/<br />
1. Translation<br />
TMT<br />
เครื่องดีด<br />
plucked instruments/ เครื่องสี<br />
bowed instruments/ เครื่องตี<br />
hit or beaten<br />
instruments/ เครื่องเปา<br />
blown instruments/<br />
254
<strong>Appendix</strong> D<br />
The Differences on Strategies Used in Presenting Thai Music Terms
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting Thai Musical Instruments<br />
<br />
<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
กระจับป<br />
3 3<br />
จะเข 4 4<br />
พิณ 3 3<br />
พิณน้ําเตา<br />
2 2<br />
พิณเพี ๊ยะ 2 2<br />
ซอ 1<br />
ซอดวง 4 4<br />
ซอสามสาย 4 2 2<br />
ซอสามสายหลีบ 3 2 1<br />
ซออู<br />
4 4<br />
ขิม 2 2<br />
ฆอง 2 2<br />
ฆองกระแต 1<br />
ฆองกลาง 2 2<br />
ฆองชัย 1<br />
ฆองมอญ 3 3<br />
ฆองมอญวงเล็ก 1<br />
256
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
ฆองราง 2 2<br />
ฆองวง 2 2<br />
ฆองวงเล็ก 5 4 1<br />
ฆองวงใหญ 5 4 1<br />
ระนาด 2 2<br />
ระนาดทอง 2 2<br />
ระนาดทุม<br />
5 2 3<br />
ระนาดทุมเหล็ก<br />
5 2 2 1<br />
ระนาดเอก 5 2 3<br />
ระนาดเอกทอง 1<br />
ระนาดเอกเหล็ก 4 4<br />
วงฆองชัย 2 2<br />
กรับ 2 2<br />
กรับคู<br />
1<br />
กรับพวง 2 2<br />
กรับเสภา 3 3<br />
กลอง 2 2<br />
257
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
ฆองราง 2 2<br />
กลองชนะ 2 2<br />
กลองชวา 2 2<br />
กลองชาตรี 3 3<br />
กลองตะโพน 1<br />
กลองตุก<br />
1<br />
กลองทัด 5 5<br />
กลองมะริกัน 2 2<br />
กลองมลายู 3 3<br />
กลองยาว 2 2<br />
กลองสองหนา 4 2 2<br />
เกราะ 2 2<br />
โกรง 2 2<br />
ฆองคู<br />
3 3<br />
ฆองระเบ็ง 2 2<br />
ฆองราว 3 3<br />
ฆองหุย<br />
4 3 1<br />
258
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
ฆองเหมง 3 3<br />
ฆองโหมง 1<br />
ฉาบ 3 2 1<br />
ฉาบเล็ก 5 2 2 1<br />
ฉาบใหญ 5 2 2 1<br />
ฉิ ่ง 5 5<br />
ตะโพน 5 2 3<br />
ตะโพนมอญ 3 3<br />
ทับ 1<br />
โทน 4 2 2<br />
โทนชาตรี 3 2 1<br />
โทนมโหรี 2 2<br />
บัณเฑาะว 2 2<br />
เปงมาง 2 2<br />
เปงมางคอก 3 3<br />
มโหระทึก 1<br />
รํามะนา 4 2 2<br />
259
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
<br />
<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
โหมง 5 4 1<br />
ขลุย<br />
3 2 1<br />
ขลุยกรวด<br />
1<br />
ขลุยเพียงออ<br />
4 4<br />
ขลุยหลีบ<br />
4 2 2<br />
ขลุยอู<br />
3 2 1<br />
แตร 1<br />
แตรงอน 2 2<br />
แตรฝรั ่ง 1<br />
แตรลางโพง 1<br />
แตรลําโพง 1<br />
แตรวิลันดา 1<br />
ป<br />
3 2 1<br />
ป กลาง 3 3<br />
ป ไฉน 3 2 1<br />
ป ชวา 3 2 1<br />
ป นอก 4 2 2<br />
260
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 7 (Continued)<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
ปใน<br />
5 4 1<br />
ปมอญ<br />
3 3<br />
ปหอ<br />
1<br />
ปออ<br />
1<br />
261
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 8 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting Thai Musical Ensembles<br />
<br />
<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
ป พาทยรามัญ 1<br />
วงกลองแขก 1<br />
วงกลองแขกปชวา 1<br />
วงขับไม 2 2<br />
วงเครื ่องสาย 4 4<br />
วงเครื่องสายเครื<br />
่องคู<br />
2 2<br />
วงเครื ่องสายวงเล็ก 2 2<br />
วงเครื่องสายปชวา 1<br />
วงเครื ่องสายผสมไวโอลิน 1<br />
วงเถิดเทิง วงเทิงบองกลองยาว 1<br />
วงบัวลอย 3 3<br />
วงปชวากลองแขก 1<br />
วงป พาทย 5 3 2<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องคู<br />
2 2<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องหา 3 3<br />
วงปพาทยเครื่องใหญ 3 2 1<br />
วงปพาทยชาตรี 2 2<br />
262
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 8 (Continued)<br />
<br />
<br />
่<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
วงปพาทยดึกดําบรรพ<br />
3 2 1<br />
วงปพาทยนางหงส<br />
3 2 1<br />
วงปพาทยมอญ<br />
3 2 1<br />
วงปพาทยมอญเครื่องคู<br />
1<br />
วงป พาทยไมนวม 3 2 1<br />
วงปพาทยอยางเบา<br />
1<br />
วงปพาทยอยางหนัก<br />
1<br />
วงมโหรี 4 2 2<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องคู<br />
1<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องเล็ก<br />
2 2<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องสี<br />
2 2<br />
วงมโหรีเคริ่องหก<br />
1<br />
วงมโหรีเครื่องใหญ<br />
1<br />
263
<strong>Appendix</strong> <strong>Table</strong> 9 The Differences in Strategies Used in Presenting Types of Thai Musical Instruments<br />
Word translation strategies<br />
Thai music terms The total number of words Same strategies<br />
Same words Different words/romanizations<br />
Different strategies<br />
เครื ่องสาย 3 2 1<br />
เครื ่องดีด 3 3<br />
เครื่องสี<br />
3 3<br />
เครื่องตี 3 2 1<br />
เครื่องดําเนินทํานอง<br />
2 2<br />
เครื ่องตีดําเนินทํานอง 2 2<br />
เครื ่องกํากับจังหวะ 2 2<br />
เครื่องตีกํากับจังหวะ 1<br />
เครื่องหนัง<br />
1<br />
เครื่องเปา<br />
4 4<br />
264